JP2019213814A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement.SOLUTION: Overall evaluation calculating means can calculate an overall evaluation in a plurality of stages from a stage with a low evaluation to a stage with a high evaluation. The greater the counted value by added value counting means is, the higher an added value evaluation is calculated. The greater the counted value by winning game frequency counting means is, the higher a winning game frequency evaluation is calculated. The greater the counted value by game frequency counting means is, the lower a game frequency evaluation is calculated. Presentation control means displays an overall evaluation on image display means when predetermined conditions are satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 113

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine technology capable of displaying an evaluation result of a game performed by a player has been known. For example, as described in Patent Document 1.

  Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine capable of ranking and displaying the number of extended games and the number of acquired payouts during a specific period.

JP-A-2005-8978

  However, the displayed content only shows the number of consecutive villas and the number of balls that have been acquired, and there is a problem that lacks interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a hit game control means capable of executing a hit game advantageous to a player, a specific game control means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to a player, and an image capable of displaying a predetermined image. A gaming machine comprising a display unit and an effect control unit capable of controlling the image display unit, wherein the game number counting unit capable of accumulating and counting the number of games during the period of the specific game; A number of hit games counting means capable of accumulating and counting the number of hit games during a game; and a value counting means for counting a value given to a player by the hit game during the specific game. A number-of-games evaluation calculating means capable of calculating a number-of-games evaluation based on the result of counting by the number-of-games counting means, and a value-added evaluation calculating means capable of calculating a value-added evaluation based on the result of counting by the value-added counting means; The hit game frequency evaluation calculating means capable of calculating the hit game frequency evaluation based on the counting result by the hit game frequency counting means, the game frequency evaluation calculating means, the added value evaluation calculating means, and the hit game frequency evaluation calculating means, A total evaluation calculating means capable of calculating an overall evaluation of the game performed by the player, based on the It can be calculated over stages, the larger the count value by the value added counting means, the higher the value added evaluation is calculated, the larger the count value by the number of hit games counting means, the higher the hit game number evaluation is calculated, The larger the count value of the number-of-games counting means, the lower the score of the number of games is calculated. It is characterized by displaying a comprehensive evaluation on the image display unit.

  According to the present invention, interest can be improved.

The perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Similarly, an exploded perspective view showing the appearance. Similarly, the front view which shows the external appearance of a game board. Similarly, the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. Similarly, a block diagram showing a main control circuit. Similarly, (a) a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. (B) A table showing the specifications of the normal symbol game. (C) A table showing per-assignment. (D) A table showing the types of hits. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the flow of a game. 8 is a flowchart showing the continuation of FIG. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main control circuit. The flowchart which similarly shows the system timer interruption process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol control process performed with a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process performed with a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the big winning opening reopening waiting time management process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening process which is executed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the hit end interval process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process performed with a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed with a sub control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with a sub control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed with a sub control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed with a sub control circuit. Is a flowchart showing the continuation of FIG. The front view showing the appearance of the game board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main control circuit. 6 is a flowchart showing a distribution device control process executed by the main control circuit. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a center accessory and a starting port unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view showing a center accessory and a starting port unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a center accessory and a starter unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view showing a center accessory and a starting port unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. The front perspective view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus, the center gutter, and the starting port unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a game ball distribution device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a game ball distribution device. The left view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus. The left side view showing the state where the communication hole was closed by the game ball distribution device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view showing a center gutter and a start-up opening unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view showing a center gutter and a starting port unit. The left side view showing the state where the communication hole was opened by the game ball distribution device. The left side view showing the state where the communication hole was closed by the game ball distribution device. A rear perspective view of a part of the game board, showing a flow of the game ball. The top view of the clune which showed the flow of the game ball. The top view of the clune which showed the flow of the game ball. FIG. 2 is a front cross-sectional view of the clune showing a flow of a game ball. FIG. 4 is a plan view of a clune showing a flow of a game ball in a conventional technique. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of a part of the game board, showing a flow of game balls. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view showing a center gutter and a starting port unit, showing a flow of a game ball in a disadvantageous course. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view showing a center gutter and a start-up opening unit showing a flow of a game ball on an advantageous course. A rear exploded perspective view showing a center gutter and a starting port unit showing a flow of a game ball on an advantageous course. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of a first movable auditors unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of a first movable accessory unit. It is the front view which omitted a part of 1st movable role unit. It is the enlarged front view which omitted a part of 1st movable role unit. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view in which a part of a first movable auditors unit is omitted. FIG. 4 is an enlarged rear view showing a first movable mechanism, with a part thereof omitted; FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a first movable mechanism, with a part thereof omitted. It is the front view which showed a 1st movable mechanism of a descent state and a part was omitted. FIG. 10 is an enlarged rear view showing a second movable mechanism, with a part thereof omitted. FIG. 10 is an enlarged rear view of the second movable mechanism in a swinging state, with a part thereof omitted. It is an exploded perspective view showing a middle finger part. It is a longitudinal section showing a middle finger part. FIG. 9 is an enlarged front view showing a second movable mechanism in an initial state, with a part thereof omitted. FIG. 9 is an enlarged front view of the second movable mechanism in a swinging state, with a part thereof omitted. FIG. 11 is an enlarged front view showing a third movable mechanism in a rotating state, with a part thereof omitted. It is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the effect device was in the initial state. It is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the first movable mechanism is in the lowered state. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine in which the 2nd movable mechanism was rocked. It is a front view showing the game machine in which the third movable mechanism was turned. It is an external appearance perspective view of a 2nd movable part unit. It is a front view of a 2nd movable role unit. It is the rear view which omitted a part of 2nd movable part unit. It is the enlarged rear view which omitted a part of 2nd movable part unit. It is an external appearance perspective view which omitted a part of 2nd movable part unit. It is a front view which shows the movable luminous body of an effect state. It is the rear view which showed the movable light-emitting body of an effect state, and a part was omitted. It is an enlarged back view which showed the movable light-emitting body of an effect state, and a part was omitted. It is a front view which shows some components of a movable light-emitting body. It is the disassembled perspective view which omitted a part of 2nd movable role unit. It is a cross-sectional view which shows a blade part. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine in which the movable luminous body was in the initial state. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine in which the movable light-emitting body was in the production state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view which shows a blade part. It is a schematic cross section which shows a blade part in the 2nd movable accessory unit which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is an external appearance perspective view showing a movable luminous body in the second movable role unit according to the third embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows a finger part in the 2nd movable accessory unit which concerns on 3rd embodiment. It is an outline transverse sectional view showing a finger part in the 2nd movable character unit concerning a third embodiment. It is a figure showing the specification of the pachinko gaming machine concerning a second embodiment. It is a figure showing a change pattern table selection table. (A) The flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process performed by a sub control circuit. (B) Similarly, a flowchart which shows a hit start effect determination process. (A) The flowchart which shows the effect determination process between rounds performed by a sub control circuit. (B) Similarly, a flowchart showing a hit end effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the hit type in a JAC game. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device while a variable display is being performed during a JAC game. It is a figure showing a screen displayed on a liquid crystal display during a jackpot game during a JAC game. (A) It is a figure showing the production flow of the big hit game when the limit is not reached. (B) It is a figure showing the production flow of the big hit game at the time of reaching the limit. (A) It is a figure showing an example of the production contents displayed by the 1st ED production. FIG. 100B is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. (C) It is a figure showing an example of the production contents displayed by a result display production. (D) FIG. 100 (c) is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. (A) It is a figure showing an example of the production contents displayed by the EX game transfer production. FIG. 101 (b) is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 101 (a). FIG. 101 (c) is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 101 (b). (A) In the 1st effect of the 1st look-ahead effect, it is a figure which shows the darkening start pattern determination table when a holding ball is first displayed on the 4th holding ball display area. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the darkening start pattern determination table when a holding ball is first displayed on the 3rd holding ball display area. (C) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the darkening start pattern determination table when a holding ball is first displayed on the 2nd holding ball display area. (A) It is a figure which shows the reservation continuous non-notification character selection table of the 2nd effect of a 1st look-ahead effect. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows a reservation continuous broadcast character selection table. The flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process regarding a character appearance availability determination table. (A) It is a figure showing an example of the concrete production contents of the first look-ahead production. FIG. 105 (b) is a view showing a continuation of FIG. 105 (a). FIG. 105 (c) is a view illustrating a continuation of FIG. 105 (b). FIG. 105 (d) is a view illustrating a continuation of FIG. 105 (c). FIG. 105 (e) is a view showing a continuation of FIG. 105 (d). FIG. 105 (f) is a view illustrating a continuation of FIG. 105 (e). FIG. 105 (g) is a view showing a continuation of FIG. 105 (f). FIG. 105 (h) is a view illustrating a continuation of FIG. 105 (g). FIG. 105 (a) is a view illustrating a continuation of FIG. 105 (h). FIG. 106 (b) is a view showing a continuation of FIG. 106 (a). FIG. 106 (c) is a view illustrating a continuation of FIG. 106 (b). (D) Similarly, it is a figure which shows another example of a continuation of FIG.106 (b). It is a production flow of a big hit production when the second look-ahead production is not performed. It is a production flow of a jackpot production when performing a second look-ahead production. The flowchart which shows the 2nd pre-reading effect execution determination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display device when two gaming balls win the big winning opening in the small hitting game. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content of the hold | maintenance continuous suggestion effect displayed on a liquid crystal display device when two game balls win in the big winning opening in the small hit game. The flowchart which shows the small hit game prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game evaluation process in a JAC game. It is a figure showing a rank point determination table of a game count. It is a figure which shows the rank point determination table of the number of JAC. It is a figure showing a rank point decision table of the number of acquired payouts. It is a figure showing a comprehensive rank decision table. It is a figure showing a game evaluation result display screen in a JAC game. It is a figure showing another example of a game evaluation result display screen in a JAC game. It is a flow chart which shows fraud detection processing of a game machine concerning a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows main CPU starting processing of a game machine concerning a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the payout / firing control circuit activation process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a sub CPU activation process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a time series of processing after power-on. It is a flow chart which shows main CPU starting processing of a game machine concerning a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pay-out / firing control circuit activation processing of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows sub CPU starting processing of a game machine concerning a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device when a specific winning effect is performed. The flowchart which shows specific winning effect determination processing.

[Composition of gaming machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the following description, the front-rear direction is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left and right directions are defined with the left hand side as the left side and the right hand side as the right side.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate. A unit 19 is provided.

  The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the dispensing unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board 17 on the front side. To support.

  The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is disposed so as to face a game board 17 (described later) in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. In addition, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are disposed on the upper portion of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, production, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is for performing, for example, notification with light or production.

  The dish unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper dish 26 and the lower dish 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

  The upper plate 26 is for storing a game ball to be launched into a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout outlet 61 and an effect button 62. The payout outlet 61 is for lending game balls and paying out (prize balls). The payout outlet 61 discharges the game ball when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button” or “push button”. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

  The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout outlet 63. The payout port 63 is for lending out game balls and paying out (prize balls) in the same manner as the payout port 63 of the upper plate 26. The payout outlet 63 discharges the game ball when the game ball overflows from the upper plate 26.

  The launching device 15 launches the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 into the game area 20. The launching device 15 is disposed at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is disposed on the surface side of the panel body 31. The driving device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 31 and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, in the launching device 15, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in accordance with the operation.

  The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decoration symbol), a jackpot effect image, a demo effect image, the number of times the identification symbol change display is suspended, and the like. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center role object 42 described later).

  The game board 17 is disposed in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 17 includes a guide rail 41, a center accessory 42, a game ball distribution device 5400 (first starting port 5442), a normal electric accessory unit 400 (second starting port 440 and a normal electric port). 460), the passage gate 49, the attacker unit 500 (large winning opening 540 and the special motorized accessory 600), the general winning openings 53, 54, 450, the out opening 55, the LED unit 70, the decorative member 56, the movable accessory unit. 57.

  The guide rail 41 is composed of two rail-like members (hereinafter, referred to as “outer rail 41a” and “inner rail 41b”). The outer rail 41a mainly partitions (defines) the game area 20. The outer rail 41a is arranged so as to surround the game area 20. The inner rail 41b, together with the outer rail 41a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 41b is disposed inside the outer rail 41a on the left side of the game board 17.

  The center role object 42 is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front. The game board 17 is opened on the inner side (inner circumference side) of the center role object 42, and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is formed. The center role object 42 is fixed to the game board 17 using screws or the like. On the front side of the center role object 42, various decorations that can be visually recognized by a player are provided. A frame-shaped member is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the center role object 42 to prevent a game ball from entering the center role object 42. Further, the upper part of the center role object 42 can divide the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into left and right sides of the center role material 42.

  The game balls fired by the firing device 15 flow down toward the lower part of the game board 17 while changing the traveling direction due to the collision with the center role object 42, the game nail 68 driven into the game board 17, and the like. . The discharged game balls are distributed to the flow-down area according to the operation amount of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the operation amount of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side of the center role object 42. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 32 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side of the center role object 42. Note that the method of hitting the game ball down the left side of the center role object 42 is called “left hit”, and the method of hitting the game ball down the right side of the center role item 42 is called “right hit”.

  The game ball distribution device 5400 is a device that appropriately distributes game balls to the first start port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444. The game ball sorting device 5400 is disposed at a substantially lower center of the game area 20.

The first start port 5442 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a first special symbol display unit 73 and a second special symbol, which will be described later. An opportunity to be displayed on the display unit 74 is given. The first start port 5442 is provided with a first start port switch 5472 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the first start port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the substrate unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Or, it is discharged (discharged) from the discharge outlet 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 is made by left-handed.
A detailed description of the configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be given later.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20.

  The second start port 440 provides an opportunity for a hit determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a first special symbol display unit 73 and a second special symbol, which will be described later. An opportunity to be displayed on the display unit 74 is given. The second start port 440 is provided with a second start port switch 441 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Or, it is discharged (discharged) from the discharge outlet 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The second starting port 440 is determined to be difficult to win by the ordinary electric accessory 460. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed.

  The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 461 that can be rotated in the left-right direction, and a start-up solenoid 462 (see FIG. 5) that drives the blade member 461. The ordinary electric accessory 460 is disposed above the second start port 440. When the blade member 461 is driven by the start opening solenoid 462, the ordinary electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass easily. Configured. When the game ball passes through the blade member 461 in the ordinary electric accessory 460, the game ball is won at the second start port 440. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 461) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

  The passing gate 49 provides a trigger for normal symbol determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed). The passing gate 49 is disposed at the center right portion of the game board 17 and above the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 5). When a game ball passes through the pass gate 49, the passed game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the special prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a lower right portion of the game area 20 and below the ordinary electric accessory unit 400.

  The big winning opening 540 is a part that can be opened in a hit game state (a big hit game state or a small hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is disposed in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the big winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can be moved back and forth in the front-rear direction, and a prize winning solenoid 620 (see FIG. 5) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is disposed above the special prize opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special prize opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the special prize opening 540, and to the special prize opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state in which winning of a game ball is impossible (or difficult). In the opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the winning game state (big hit gaming state or This is performed when the game is shifted to the small hit game state.

  The general winning ports 53 and 54 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board 17 in a state of being separated from each other. Further, the general winning opening 450 is provided in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The general winning opening 53/54/450 is provided with a general winning opening switch 53a / 54a / 451 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the general winning opening 53/54/450, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a / 54a / 451. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27) (discharge). )

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 have three award balls, the general winning ports 53, 54 and 450 have ten award balls, and the big winning port 540 has a prize ball. The number is set to 15 each. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 55 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game board 17. The out port 55 is finally introduced when the launched game ball does not win a winning (starting) port such as the first starting port 5442.

  The LED unit 70 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 17 and outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol display unit. A symbol hold display portion 75 and a second special symbol hold display portion 76 are provided.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 according to the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination). The normal symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start changing display that alternately turns on and off when a predetermined change display start condition is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a win, the combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

  The normal symbol hold display section 72 displays the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the normal symbols that are held (hereinafter referred to as “the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol fluctuation display”). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol hold display unit 72 displays the number of times the normal symbol fluctuating display is held by a combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

  The 1st special symbol display part 73 and the 2nd special symbol display part 74 display the result (judgment determination) result with respect to a special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of determination (winning determination).

  The first special symbol display section 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by a winning of a game ball (start winning) at the first start port 5442, and displays a result of a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 5442 is a win, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 5442 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays a variation display triggered by a winning of a game ball (start winning) at the second starting port 440, and displays a result of a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is a win, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the winning gaming state that is advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a winning gaming state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state as a winning gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit gaming states are provided as gaming states that shift from the normal gaming state.

  The first special symbol hold display section 75 and the second special symbol hold display section 76 indicate the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol being held (hereinafter referred to as “the special symbol variable display hold count”). To display. The first special symbol hold display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of times of special symbol change display hold by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display mode of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b is the same as that of the display LEDs 72a and 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

  The decoration member 56 is a member that decorates the game board 17. The decorative member 56 is arranged on the upper side of the game board 17 and on the inner peripheral side of the center role object 42. The decorative member 56 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape whose longitudinal direction is the left-right direction. On the surface side (player side) of the decorative member 56, a decoration imitating a logo (character), a character, a symbol, or the like is applied. The decorative member 56 is configured to emit light by an LED (not shown) or the like.

  The movable accessory unit 57 is a unit body in which a movable accessory and a drive source, which will be described later, are integrated. The movable accessory unit 57 can enhance the interest of the player by performing a predetermined performance operation using the movable accessory. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory unit 57 includes a first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400), a second movable accessory unit 82, and a third movable accessory unit 83.

The first movable role unit (producing device 2400) is arranged at the upper right of the game board 17 and on the inner peripheral side of the center role 42.
A detailed description of the configuration of the first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400) will be given later.

The second movable accessory unit 82 is disposed at the upper part of the game board 17 and behind the decorative member 56.
A detailed description of the configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be given later.

  The third movable auditors units 83 are arranged on the right and left portions of the game board 17 and behind the center auditorium 42, respectively. The third movable accessory unit 83 includes a hand accessory 86 (third movable accessory) imitating a human hand. The hand accessory 86 is configured to move. The hand accessory 86 is configured to be lit. In the standby state as shown in FIG. 3 (a state in which no staging operation is performed), most of the hand auditors 86 are hidden behind the game board 17 and the center auditors 42, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize them. Further, most of the hand accessory 86 is exposed to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the operating state (the state in which the effect is being performed), and is easily visible to the player.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of internal processing when a game ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

  When the game ball wins the first start port 5442, the first start port switch 5472 detects the winning game ball, and the first special symbol display unit 73 starts to display the variation of the first special symbol. Further, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 5442 during the variation display of the first special symbol, the game to the first start opening 5442 is stopped until the first special symbol during the variation display is stopped. Execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. Thereafter, when the first special symbol being displayed in a variable state is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started.

  When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the second special symbol display unit 74 starts the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, when a game ball is won at the second start opening 440 during the variation display of the second special symbol, the game to the second start opening 440 is continued until the second special symbol during the variation display is stopped. The execution (start) of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. Thereafter, when the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started.

  In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while one of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is displaying a special symbol variation display, the other display unit does not perform a special symbol variation display. . In the present embodiment, when execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended, priority is given to the start winning at the second start port 440, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

  In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to an upper limit of 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of the special symbol variation display is eight times, which is the total number of suspensions of the special symbol variation display due to winning in the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440.

  In addition, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes on the liquid crystal display device 16 except in specific cases. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from “1” to “8” are used as the numbers. In addition, the identification symbol variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed with the first or second special symbol being variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 being stopped and stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as presentation identification information.

  Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a win. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the present embodiment, as described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Moreover, the specific stop display mode in the case where the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed is set corresponding to the winning type. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to winning. Note that some of the winning types have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it is difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of the winning.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Below, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game and a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like.

  A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing information on special symbol games as start-up storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a first upper limit of four times are stored. There are provided a first special symbol start storage area (4) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as a start memory, and a second special symbol for the upper limit of four times. There are provided a second special symbol start storage area (4) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as a start memory.

  The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when power is cut off.

  Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, A second special symbol hold display section 76, a start port solenoid 462 for driving the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, a prize winning port solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. In addition, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines throughout the hall. An external terminal board 320 is connected.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a first start port switch 5472, a second start port switch 441, a pass gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 451, and the like. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. The main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing backup data in the event of a power interruption in accordance with the operation of the game hall manager.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a payout / launch control circuit 300. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 that pays out game balls, a launch device 350 that fires game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation to the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

  Upon receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out the game ball. Further, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the payout / launch control circuit 300 supplies power to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Supply and control to fire game balls.

  Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to the light of the lamp 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a signal can be transmitted to the main control circuit 100 from the control circuit 200. FIG.

  The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect corresponding to the progress of the game in accordance with a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium that can be read by a computer having control means. Any other embodiment may be used. For example, a storage medium such as a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage unit. Further, the program, the table, and the like may not be recorded in advance but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

  The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for buffering image data, and image data as image signals. And a D / A converter or the like for conversion.

  The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Note that the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating an identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

  Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can perform control to display an image related to the game on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The sound control circuit 205 is a circuit for performing control related to sound generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that performs control related to audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying an audio signal, and the like.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from a plurality of pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in accordance with a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 24.

  The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including a decorative lamp. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

  The accessory control circuit 207 controls the movable accessory unit 57 (first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400), second movable accessory unit 82, and third movable accessory unit 83). Circuit. The accessory control circuit 207 stores a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to the movable accessory unit 57, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern. It has a data ROM and the like.

  Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM according to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the mechanical operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by reading the selected operation pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the lighting operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[basic specifications]
Hereinafter, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 6 is a table showing basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. FIG. 6B is a table showing the specifications of the normal symbol game. FIG. 6C is a table showing the hit distribution. FIG. 6D is a table showing the hit types. Note that the data in the tables shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored as a table in the main ROM 102.

  In the special symbol game, the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. In this way, in a special symbol game, a gaming state in which a big hit determination is performed in a low probability state is simply referred to as a low probability state (or a normal state or an uncertain change state). In a special symbol game, a gaming state in which a big hit determination is performed in a high probability state is simply referred to as a high probability state (or probability variation state). Thus, when the gaming state becomes a probable change state, a state more advantageous than the normal state is given to the player.

  In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a win, the normal electric accessory 460 is released (ordinary hit game) for a relatively long time. In this way, in a normal symbol game, a game state in which normal symbol determination is performed with a high probability state and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened for a relatively long time is referred to as an electric support state. In the electric support state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than that in the case of not being in the electric support state. As described above, a state in which the current state is the electric support state and is performed in a short time per normal symbol determination is referred to as a time reduction state. It should be noted that the high probability state of the normal symbol determination is configured to be able to shift when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. Further, the high probability state of the normal symbol determination is ended when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, for example, when the time-short state is ended.

  In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in a gaming state other than the short-time state. As described above, a gaming state in which normal symbol determination is not performed (a gaming state other than the short-time state) is referred to as a normal state (or a non-short-time state). In this way, when the gaming state becomes the short-time state, a state more advantageous than the non-short-time state is given to the player. The time reduction state is continued until a hit determination (a big hit determination and a small hit determination) is performed a predetermined number of times after the transition from the normal state, for example, in a special symbol game.

  As described above, the normal state is a gaming state in which the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state in the special symbol game, and a gaming state in which the normal symbol determination is not performed in the normal symbol game.

  First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of the jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) will be a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot probability) In any case of the start winning of the start port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (one coefficient for 200 random numbers). In addition, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variation state) is 1/100 (200 random numbers) in common in any of the start winnings of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440. 2 coefficients). Further, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a win by the start winning of the second start port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random numbers). Is set. Note that the small hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small hit game is started based on the game ball winning at the second start port 440 is that the small hit game is started based on the game ball winning at the first start port 5442. It is set higher than the probability.

  In addition, the ST number is set to 100 times in common regardless of whether the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 is a big win due to the start winning. Note that ST (special time) is a probability variation state that ends according to the number of times (number-of-times cut type). In the following description, unless otherwise specified, “times” indicates the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after shifting to the probability variation state.

  Note that the ST number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a super-probability change state described later is reached. Specifically, when the super-probability change state is entered, 0 is displayed as the initial value. Each time the hit determination is repeated once (the determination result is lost), a state in which a numerical value is incremented by 1 is displayed. Then, when the numerical value of the number of STs reaches 100, the super-probability change state ends. The initial value may be 100 instead of 0. Thus, when the initial value of the ST count is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated once.

  In addition, the number of winning balls for winning at the first starting port 5442 is three, the number of winning balls for winning at the second starting port 440 is one, and the number of winning balls for winning at the general winning ports 53, 54, and 450 is The number of winning balls for 10 winning prizes to the big winning opening 540 is set to 15 respectively. Further, the maximum winning count number per opening of the big winning opening 540 in the big hit game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the maximum winning count per opening of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the normal symbol game is set to 10 counts. Further, regardless of the start winning of either the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440, the number of jackpot symbols is set to 100 in common. Further, the number of small winning symbols in the case of starting winning a prize at the second starting port 440 is set to 100.

  Next, the specifications of the normal symbol game will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in a low probability state. In addition, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is set to 100/100 is set. When the result of the normal symbol determination is a win, the second start port 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460) is opened three times for 1.5 seconds, which is a relatively long time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6C, the big hit and the small hit distribution will be described.

  As shown in FIG.6 (c), the big hit by the start winning of the 1st start port 5442 is distributed into six types of big hit contents (big hit type). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the first start port 5442 is distributed to 15R probability change, substantially 10R probability change, substantially 5R probability change, 15R normal, substantially 10R normal, and substantially 5R normal. The contents of these jackpots are set so as to correspond to special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as a jackpot by the start winning of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

  Specifically, the 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -1. Further, a special 10R probability change is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -2. Further, a special 5R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -3. Moreover, 15R normal is set corresponding to special figure (1) big hit -4. Further, in response to the special figure (1) big hit -5, substantially 10R normal is set. Further, in response to the special figure (1) big hit -6, a substantial 5R normal is set.

  Further, the jackpot due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 is distributed into six types of jackpot contents (jacket types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the second start port 440 is distributed to 15R probability change, real appearance small amount change, special probability change, 15R normal, real appearance small normal, special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to the special figure (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as the jackpot by the start winning of the second starting port 440, respectively.

  Specifically, the 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -1. In addition, a substantial variation of the ball appearance is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -2. In addition, special probability variation is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -3. Moreover, 15R normal is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -4. Further, a special normal amount of balls is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -5. Also, special normal is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -6.

  The small hits are divided into two types of small hit contents (small hit types). Specifically, the small hits are divided into two times (1) and two times (2). These small hit contents are set so as to correspond to the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 as the small hits, respectively. Specifically, two times of opening (1) is set corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit -1. Further, in response to the special figure (2) small hit -2, the opening twice (2) is set.

  Here, the “number” column (notation) shown in the table of FIG. 6C shows the number of big hit symbols or the number of small hit symbols corresponding to each hit content. That is, as described above, since the number of jackpot symbols due to the start winning of the first start port 5442 is 100, the special figure (1) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the first start port 5442. Probability (expected value) for each distribution is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, when the special figure (2) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the second starting port 440, the probability (expected value) to be assigned is 25%, 15%, 10%, It is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 are set such that the probability (expected value) of sorting is 98% and 2%, respectively, in the case of small hits.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), special figure (1) big hit -1 to 6, special figure (2) big hit -1 to 6, and special figure (2) small hit -1 and 2, A short time is set after each winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is completed. The number of time reductions given after the winning game ends is set to be different depending on the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big hit determination or the small hit determination is performed.

  Here, the notation “HH” shown in the table of FIG. 6C indicates that the special symbol game is in a probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a short-time state. The notation “HL” indicates that the special symbol game is in a probable variation state and that the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state. The notation “LH” indicates that the special symbol game is in an uncertain change state and the normal symbol game is in a short time state. The notation “LL” indicates that the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state. Furthermore, the notation “between high probabilities” indicates that a special symbol game is given a high probability state, that is, a maximum of 100 time reductions.

  In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state (in the case of “LL”), the special symbol (1) big hit -1 or 6 big hit , 50 times are assigned. On the other hand, for example, similarly in the case of “LL”, if the special figure (1) big hit -2 to 5 big hits, the number of time reductions is not given. That is, when the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state, if it is a big hit by the start winning of the first start port 5442, 35% (special figure (1) big hit- The number of time reductions is given 50 times with a probability of 25% in the case of 1 + 10% in the special figure (1) big hit -6), and the time reduction number is not given with the remaining 65% probability.

  In the case of the small hit, after the small hit game is finished, the game state before the small hit is not changed in principle and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit is made during the ST, the ST is restarted after the small hit game is finished, so as to continue counting from the ST count related to the hit determination for the small hit. For example, during the ST, when a small hit is made at the 60th time, the ST is restarted so that counting is started from the 61st time after the end of the small hit game. In this case, the remaining number of STs after the end of the small hit game is 40 times. Similarly, when a small hit is made during the short-time state, the short-time state is resumed after the small-hit game is finished, so that counting is continued from the number of times related to the hit determination.

  As an exception to the above principle, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time (which is the final time of ST) during ST, ST is ended after the small hit game ends (the state before the small hit) Is not maintained). Similarly, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time in the short-time state of 100 times, the short-time state is ended after the small-hit game is finished (the state before the small-hit is not maintained).

  Hereinafter, the winning content (big hit content and small hit content) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the content of the big hit (type of big hit) is 15R probability variation, 15R normal, substantial 10R probability variation, substantial 10R normal, substantial 5R probability variation, substantial 5R normal, special probability variation, special normal, substantial output. There is a slight variation, and a small amount of actual appearance. In addition, two small openings (1) and (2) are provided as small hit contents (small hit types).

  15R probability change and 15R normal is a jackpot where the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in all rounds of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. is there. In this way, in the 15R probability variation and 15R normal, when the big hit game is started, the upper limit number of game balls are set to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in all rounds.

  The real 10R probability change and the real 10R normal means that when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big prize opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 10th rounds out of all 15 rounds. This is a jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the eleventh to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. As described above, in the actual 10R probability change and the actual 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set to be able to enter the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win the big winning opening 540.

  The real 5R probability change and the real 5R normal means that when the big hit game is started, the number of seconds for opening the grand prize winning opening 540 per round in the first to fifth rounds is 27.996 seconds when the big hit game is started. This is a jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the sixth to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. In this way, in the real 5R probability change and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set to be able to enter the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win the big winning opening 540.

  Special probability change and special normal are set so that the big prize opening 540 is opened three times in the first round of all 15 rounds when the big hit game is started, and the first round In the first and second opening, the opening number of the grand prize opening 540 is set to 0.896 seconds, and in the remaining third opening, the opening number of the big winning opening 540 is set to 26.466 seconds. From the 15th round to the 15th round, the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round is a big hit set at 27.966 seconds. In this way, in the special probability change and special normal, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in the first and second rounds in the first round (for example, 1 per round It is set so that the upper limit number of game balls can be won in the big winning opening 540 in the remaining third release and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In the special probability change and special normal, the interval between releases between the second release and the third release in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

  In the case of the real appearance small play change and the real play small normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the first to second rounds out of all 15 rounds. Is set to 896 seconds, and is the jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the third to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. As described above, in the case where there is a substantial change in the actual number of balls and a small amount of actual balls, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds (more specifically, in the first and second rounds). Is set so that, for example, one game ball is won per opening and the game ball is almost impossible to win after the third round. Note that the interval between rounds between the second round and the third round is set to 5.0 seconds in the case where there is a substantial change in the actual number of balls and the normal number of balls in the actual number.

  Opening twice (1) and (2) are small hits that open the big winning opening 540 twice every 0.896 seconds when the small hit game is started. That is, the small hit game is to operate the big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode. In this manner, in the two-time opening (1) and (2), even if the small hit game is started, the game is started. The ball is set to be difficult to win in the special winning opening 540 (for example, one ball is won per opening). In the second opening (1), the small hitting end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. In the second opening (2), the small hit end interval after the second opening of the special winning opening 540 is completed is set to 5.0 seconds.

  Thus, when the type of jackpot is special probability variation and special normal, the number of seconds of opening of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second rounds of the first round, and the case of a small jackpot (open twice (1) And in the case of (2)), the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 in the first and second opening is set to 0.896 seconds which are the same as each other. In other words, the special probability change and special normal, and the small hits (two times opening (1) and (2)), the opening mode of the big prize opening 540 is the same until the second opening of the big prize opening 540 is completed. Is set. In this way, the special probability variation and special normal big hit games open and close the big prize opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hit open / close mode) that makes the small hit game appear in the first and second rounds of the first round. It is something to be made.

  It should be noted that in the small hits (second open (1) and (2)), the hit end intervals after the opening of the second big winning opening 540 are set to be different from each other. Specifically, in the second opening (1), the hit end interval after the opening of the second big prize opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the hit end interval after the opening of the second big prize opening 540 is set to 5.0 seconds.

  In addition, the interval between the second opening and the third opening in the special probability change and special normal and the small hit end interval in the second open (2) of the small hits are the same number of seconds. (5.0 seconds). That is, in the special probability change and special normal, and the small opening twice (2), the opening manner of the big winning opening 540 is set to be the same until the third opening of the big winning opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability change and special normal jackpot games are determined to be jackpot games after the third release of the first round is performed. In this way, the special probability variation and special normal jackpot games are operated in the pseudo-small hit opening / closing mode, and then the special winning opening 540 is opened / closed in a specific opening / closing mode (opening / closing mode after jackpot finding) that turns out to be a big hit game. It is something to be made.

  Similarly, the number of seconds for opening the big winning opening 540 in the opening of the first and second rounds when the type of the big hit is a real change in the actual number of balls and the normal amount of the actual number of balls and the case of a small hit (opened twice) In the case of (1) and (2)), the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 in the first and second opening is set to 0.896 seconds which are the same as each other. In other words, the actual payout small change, the normal play small normal, and the small hit (2 times opening (1) and (2)) are the big prize opening 540 until the second opening of the big prize opening 540 is completed. Are set to be the same.

  In addition, the interval between rounds between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the real odds small probability change and the real odds small normal, and the small hit ending interval in the second open (2) of the small hits And are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds). That is, the actual appearance of a small amount of balls and the normal amount of small numbers of balls and the small opening twice (2) means that the opening mode of the big prize opening 540 is until the third opening of the big prize opening 540 is started. Set the same. In this way, the big hit game of the real hitting small probability change and the real hitting little normal hit game is a big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hitting opening / closing mode) that looks like the small hit game in the first and second rounds of opening. Is opened and closed.

[Game flow]
Below, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described using FIG. 7 and FIG.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game proceeds while repeating the transition to an appropriate gaming state at a predetermined timing. Here, a corresponding production mode is set for each of the gaming states. Various production contents are set in the production mode. That is, when the game is started, the game state is shifted to an appropriate game state, and an effect in the effect mode corresponding to the transferred game state is performed. In the present embodiment, effect modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as effect modes.

  As shown in FIG. 7, at the start of the game, in many cases, the game state is a normal game state (non-probability change state / non-time reduction (non-electric support) state). In the normal gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal gaming state to another gaming state is mainly triggered by the result of the hit determination by the starting winning of the first starting port 5442. In exceptional cases, for example, when there is suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol when the electric support state of 100 times ends, the hit determination of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is the maximum number of times of suspension. It is performed up to four times, and if any big hit occurs as a result of the determination, the state shifts to the power support state. However, since this is a rare case, it is omitted from the drawing. It should be noted that, since the power support state has been completed for the above four times, it is possible to return to the power support state if a big hit is made at that time. While performing the hit determination, the player may have a sense of expectation as a special production mode different from the production mode 1.

  In the normal gaming state, the big hit determination is performed by starting winning of the first starting port 5442 by so-called left-handed. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 becomes a big hit and the gaming state shifts to the short time (electric support) state, so-called right-handed is performed. In this way, while the short time (electric support) state continues, the big hit determination is performed by the start winning of the second start port 440. In addition, although the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 becomes a big hit, when the gaming state does not shift to the short-time (electric support) state (the gaming state is non-short-time (non-electric support) state Left-handed).

  When the gaming state shown in step S900 is in a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the production in the production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit judgment (win judgment) is a special figure (1) big hit When -1, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is ended, and the effect in the effect mode 2 is started (steps S901 and S902). In the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the ST number is set to 100 times, and the time reduction number is set to 50 times.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit− When it becomes any one of 1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S910, S911). That is, the gaming state after the transition is the same as the gaming state before the transition. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 2 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Note that, in the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the ST number is set to 100 times, and the time reduction number is set to continue during the probability changing state (up to 100 times).

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit − When any of 1 to 3 is reached, the gaming state shifts again to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S912 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 3 is continued. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the ST number and the short time number counted until the big hit is cleared. That is, the ST number and the time reduction number are counted from 0.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit − When any of 4 to 6 is reached, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state described later (steps S913 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 3 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (open twice ( In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability variation state) and the short-time state end, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is not restarted (steps S914 and S915; No). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) is lost. The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability change state) and the short-time state end, so the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is not restarted (steps S916, S915; No). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit− If it becomes any of 4 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S920 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 2 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started. Note that, in the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of time savings is set to 100 times.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit −1 If it becomes any of 3 from 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S922 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 4 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -4 If it becomes any of 6 from 6, the game state will again shift to the non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S923, S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 4 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the production mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (open twice (1 ) And (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the short-time state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S924, S925; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is an uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 4 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the time reduction state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S926, S925; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (the hit determination) is determined (open twice ( In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so the probability variation state / non-time reduction ( The gaming state shifts to the (non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 2 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S930, S931; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 2 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) is lost. The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so the probability variation state / non-time reduction ( The gaming state shifts to the (non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 2 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support)) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 2 is continued.

  As described above, when the production in the production mode 2 is finished and the production in the production mode 5 is started, the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction (electric support) state is finished. That is, the player makes a left strike instead of a right strike. In the present embodiment, the effect in effect mode 5 is set to the same content as the effect in effect mode 1. Thus, when the production of the production mode 5 is started, the player enters a gaming state (latent probability variation state) in which it is difficult to recognize that the ST (probability variation state) is continuing. The production in the production mode 5 may have the same content as the production in the production mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability changing state has been determined.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When either the big hit -1 or 2 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state / short time (electric support) state (steps S934, S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -3, the gaming state shifts again to the probability variation state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (steps S935 and S933). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the ST number counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -4 or 5, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (that is, a normal gaming state) (steps S936 and S900). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 1 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -6, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S937 and S951). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 6 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a certain change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the production in the production mode 5 is performed, The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number, ST (probability change state) ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S938, S939; Yes). , S900). That is, the production in the production mode 5 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number, the current gaming state (probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state) is maintained, the ST number is not cleared, and the count is The process is resumed (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the production in the production mode 5 is continued.

  Note that the predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what the presentation of the presentation mode 5 currently being started is triggered. Specifically, when the production of the production mode 5 currently being performed is triggered by the number of hit determinations being 50 after the production of the production of the production mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes). ), The predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 (from the start of the effect in effect mode 5). On the other hand, the currently performed effect in the effect mode 5 is the special figure (1) big hit -2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) big hit -3 shown in step S935. Is started as a trigger, the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 (from the start of the effect in effect mode 5).

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -6, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 6 is started (steps S950 and S951). In the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 50.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes any one of -1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S952 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 6 ends and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When any of -4 to 6 is reached, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S953 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 6 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (opened twice). In (1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time-short state is completed, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 6 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S954, S955; No). That is, the production in the production mode 6 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the time reduction state ends, so the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 6 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support)) is maintained, the short time number is not cleared, Counting is resumed (steps S956, S955; No).

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -2 or 3, the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state (steps S960, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 1 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -4 or 5, the game state shifts to the normal game state again. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S970 and S900).

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-time-saving (non-electric support) state and the production of the production mode 1 is performed, if the result of the big hit judgment (hit judgment) is lost, The normal gaming state is maintained. That is, the effect in effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980 and S900).

  In such a game flow, when the production mode 2 is started (step S902), the ST state is set to 100 times by shifting the game state to the probability change state / short time (electric support) state. The Similarly, when the effect mode 3 is started (step S911), the ST state is set to 100 times when the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state. Thus, after the production mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after ST is started), for example, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained (in principle) after the small hit game ends. , ST count is not cleared and counting is resumed. In this way, the effect in the effect mode 2 or 3 is continued.

  Here, as described above, when the small hit game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened twice so that one game ball is won per opening. In other words, when the production mode 2 or 3 is started (when ST is started), for example, the number of hit determinations is a predetermined number of times until the production mode ends (until the ST ends). In the meantime, the small hit game can be repeated. In this way, when the small hit game is repeatedly performed, a prize ball can be obtained by the small hit game, and the number of game balls at hand of the player can be increased.

  In the following, an ST in which a prize ball is obtained by a small hit game and the number of game balls in the player's hand can be increased is referred to as a super-probability change state. In addition, a game in which a winning ball is obtained by a small hit game after entering the super-probability change state and the number of game balls in the player's hand is increased is referred to as rush (RUSH). That is, the rush (per time) continues from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probable change state until the next big hit or the end of the short-time state. As described above, in the present embodiment, a game in which the short-time state ends (for example, a game of 100 hits or 50 hits described later) is a rush end condition.

  In addition, after the production mode 2 is started, when the production mode 3 is started by any one of the special figures (2) jackpot -1 to 3, the game state before and after the jackpot is in a highly probable state. For this reason, it is assumed that the super-probable variation state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that the rush is continuously performed (the second rush is performed).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the super-probable change state occurs, the payout display related to the obtained payout is performed. The detailed explanation about the above-mentioned payout display will be described later.

[Description of main control circuit operation]
Hereinafter, processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described.

[Main processing]
First, a main process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

  In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random value counter, the rendering condition selection random value counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

  In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 and an opening time timer for the big prize opening 540. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination result is a win according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. The processing to do is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. Details of this process will be described later.

  In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a win according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 49 a, and performs a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

  In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processes in step S13 and step S14. Then, a process of storing a control signal for driving the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and the normal symbol display unit 71. Thus, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 performs variable display and stop display of the special symbol based on the received control signal. Moreover, the normal symbol display part 71 carries out the variable display and stop display of a normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

  In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (for example, the calling device or the hall computer). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the special winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second start opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

  In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

  In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 receives game balls in various winning holes (specifically, the big winning hole 540, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440, and the general winning ports 53, 54, and 450). It is determined whether or not When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has won at various winning ports, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the win to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again and repeats the process from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Hereinafter, a system timer interrupt process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
The system timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the main process at predetermined intervals even when the main process is being performed.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

  In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs a random value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the jackpot determination random number counter, the jackpot symbol determination random value counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

  In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs a switch input process. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses various switches (specifically, the first start port switch 5472, the second start port switch 441, the passing gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, and the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 451). Or the like) (that is, whether or not a game ball is detected in various switches). The main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 200 when it is determined that a game ball has been detected at any of the various switches (when a game ball has won at any of the various winning ports). . For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) a game ball, the main CPU 101 transmits a big prize opening prize command to the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. Details of this process will be described later.

  In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 101 restores the saved program to the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 11, numerical values written on the sides of step S <b> 101 to step S <b> 108 indicate control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in steps S101 to S108 to be executed. The numerical value is stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103.

  In step S100, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

  In step S101 to step S108, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 executes a step corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the process in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and determines each process at a predetermined timing set for each step according to the determination result. Process in steps. As a result, the specific symbol game proceeds. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. The main CPU 101 also performs a system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 at predetermined intervals, separately from this subroutine.

  In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

  In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control state flag when the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. And a waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 performs setting so that the process of step S103 is performed after a waiting time after determination has elapsed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

  In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has passed, the main CPU 101 receives a hit determination result (big hit or small hit). It is determined whether or not. When the result of the hit determination is win, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

  In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal to open the special winning opening 540 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. , And supply to the grand prize opening solenoid 620. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs opening / closing control of the special winning opening 540.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the special winning opening opening time timer. Set to. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

  In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening number counter when the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so that “1” is increased. The main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is being opened in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) in the big prize opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

  In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 101 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big winning opening opening time timer is “0” is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, while setting a value (05H) indicating the big winning opening reopening waiting time management when it is not the final round. Set to control status flag. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

  In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs a hit end interval process. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set the status flag. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

  In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  As described above, when the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag, the special symbol game is advanced. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “07H” when the hit determination result is lost in the case of not being in the big hit or small hit gaming state. By setting in order, the processing of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S108 shown in FIG. 11 is performed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is big hit or small hit, the control state flag is set to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”. By setting in order, the processing of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 11 is performed at a predetermined timing to control to the big hit or small hit gaming state. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “04H” and “05H” when the control to the big hit or the small hit game state is performed, thereby performing steps S105 and S106 shown in FIG. The big hit or the small hit game is performed at the predetermined timing. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” when the big hit or small hit game ending condition is satisfied, so that step S105 shown in FIG. The processing of step S107 and step S108 is performed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit or small hit game is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol storage check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 111, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, from the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data (a random number for hit determination) is stored from the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is a start memory (more specifically, a start memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 sets a value that permits execution of the demonstration display as the demonstration display permission value when the state in which the special symbol game start-up memory is 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Then, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display command when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the demonstration display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is zero. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is data in the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is zero. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S115. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S <b> 114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02 </ b> H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

  In step S <b> 115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01 </ b> H) indicating the variation of the first special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

  In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

  In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 transfers each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 uses the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) for the second special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S118.

  In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of determination values (hit determination values) that are big hits based on the read high probability flag. To do. That is, when the high probability flag has a predetermined value, the high probability hit (big hit) determination table with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not the predetermined value, the big hit determination A normal hit (big hit) determination table with a small value is referred to. Thus, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state), the probability of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved as compared with the normal time.

  Then, the main CPU 101 extracts a random number value for the hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (is lost) when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player (big hit determination) in the big hit determination processing. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

  In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is performed when the big hit determination process in step S118 is not a big hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 pre-sets the hit determination random number value of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). It is determined whether or not the determination value for the small hit matches. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that there is no small hit (lost) when the hit determination random number value does not match the small hit determination value. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter the small hit gaming state (small hit determination) in the small hit determination process.

  In this embodiment, two types of normal determination and high probability (probability variation) are prepared as a hit determination random number stored in the first special symbol start storage area and a hit determination table to be referenced. There are two types of hit determination tables, one for normal use and one for high probability (for probability variation), as a hit determination table to be referenced with the random number value for hit determination stored in the second special symbol start storage area. A table is provided. Note that the two types of normal hit determination tables have the same big hit probability, and the two types of high hit determination tables have the same big hit probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit determination values in the normal hit determination table and the high probability (probability change) hit determination table, which are referred to the hit determination random number value stored in the first special symbol start storage area. Are the same. In addition, the number of small hit determination values in the normal hit determination table and the high probability (probability change) hit determination table referred to the hit determination random number value stored in the second special symbol start storage area is the same. It is. As described above, the main CPU 101 can obtain a larger number of game balls than the normal game state on the condition that the game balls have passed the start area (first start port 5442, second start port 440). 1 hit game state, second hit game state where a small amount of game balls can be obtained compared to the first hit game state, and third hit where a game ball equivalent to the second hit game state can be obtained It is an example of the hit determination means for determining whether to shift to the gaming state.

  Note that the small hit probability due to winning at the first start port 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the small hit probability due to winning at the second start port 440. The big hit probability due to winning in the first start opening 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the big hit probability due to winning in the second start opening 440.

  As described above, the process of steps S118 and S119 determines one of big hit, small hit, and loss as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the hit determination result is a big hit, determines a small hit symbol when the hit determination result is a small hit, and if neither the big hit nor the small hit is obtained, That is, in the case of losing, the losing symbol is determined. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

  In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern for determining a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the processing of step S120 and the result of the hit determination determined in the processing of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) the variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random number extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the data indicating such a variation pattern.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. As a result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 with the determined variation pattern. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure variation pattern designation command. Thereby, the effect display according to the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation | designated command is performed by control of the sub control circuit 200. FIG. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S122.

  In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

  In step S <b> 123, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub control circuit 200 starts an effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

  In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variation display. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S151. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S156.

  In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the variation state number is (01H). If the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is (01H), it moves the process to step S152. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is not (01H), the process proceeds to step S154.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determining random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

  In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol data of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 73. The first special symbol display unit 73 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the big hit stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determining random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

  In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big special symbol data of the second special symbol and the big special symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a mode based on the big hit symbol data. Also, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the big hit stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S160. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not the small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S164.

  In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

  In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data for a small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command for the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the small hit symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the small hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the small special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. . As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the winning symbol (big winning symbol, small winning symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 hits a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and sets hit start interval display time data corresponding to a symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

  In step S <b> 163, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting data related to the number of times of winning a prize opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big prize opening number related data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 164, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting data for a lost symbol and a command for a lost symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and the first special symbol display unit according to whether the changing special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the loss symbol data of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a loss stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

  In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

  In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after determination. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the post-confirmation waiting time in an area that functions as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S302. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S304.

  In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 303, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the game state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S304, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S <b> 305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the hourly number counter is “0”, it moves the process to step S325. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S <b> 306, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

  In step S <b> 307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the hourly number counter is “0”, it moves the process to step S308. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S325.

  In step S <b> 308, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the time count flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

  In step S309, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a time reduction end command in the main RAM 103. The short time end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the short time. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

  In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the ST number counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S310. On the other hand, when determining that the ST number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S326.

  In step S326, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

  In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the ST number counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S328. On the other hand, when determining that the ST number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S310.

  In step S328, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the ST number flag in the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S329.

  In step S329, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an ST end command in the main RAM 103. The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the end of ST. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

  In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. When determining that the small hit is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S315.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

  In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit start interval time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. In addition, although the hit start interval time is determined for each hit type, in this embodiment, at least the special probability change, the special normal, the real output small probability change, the real output small normal and the special figure (2) small hit -2 The hitting start interval time is set to be the same or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 1 second).

  In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process of step S314.

  In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol. The big hit start command or the small hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the start of big hit or small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

  In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Period start interval management processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit start interval management processing) performed in step S104 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 403, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value of the main RAM 103.

  In step S <b> 404, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

  In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each round or for a small hit according to the type of the big hit symbol. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

  In step S <b> 406, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the special winning opening open display command is data indicating the first round. The special prize opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special prize opening opening command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

  In step S407, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

  In step S <b> 408, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

  In step S <b> 409, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value of a waiting time timer as a special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

  In step S <b> 410, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the special winning opening 540. The variables stored in this way will drive the special prize opening solenoid 620 to open the special prize opening 540. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening reopening waiting time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening reopening waiting time management processing) performed in step S105 in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process. If the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the big winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 502, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

  In step S <b> 503, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command for opening the special winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The display command data during the big prize opening opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform round counter +1. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

  In step S504, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

  In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S506. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S <b> 506, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S507.

  In step S <b> 507, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

  In step S <b> 508, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Big prize opening process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the big prize opening process, the process proceeds to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the grand prize winning prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the big prize opening winning counter is “10” or more, it moves the process to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the grand prize winning prize counter is not “10” or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S602.

  In step S <b> 602, the main CPU 101 performs a big prize opening / closing process according to the set round / small opening / closing pattern. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of opening / closing the special winning opening 540 according to the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit set in step S405. Specifically, the process of opening and closing the special prize opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of closing and opening the special prize opening 540 after waiting for time in accordance with the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit I do. If this process ends, the process moves to a step S603.

  Here, in this embodiment, special probability change, special normal interval time between the first opening of the first round and the second opening, special figure (2) small opening -2 of the first opening and the second opening The interval time between the releases is set to the same or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds). That is, in the processing of step S602, the special probability change, the special normal, and the special map (2) small hit -2 are obtained by "0.896 second opening time → 0.1 second opening interval time → 0.896 second opening time. It is executed in the order of “time”. In addition, although not processed in this step, it is set in step S607, but the interval time between the rounds of the first round and the second round of the actual first and second rounds is also the same or By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), the opening time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → two rounds of 0.896 seconds It is executed in the order of “opening time of eyes”. As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the hit type based on the time during which the special winning opening 540 is closed.

  In step S <b> 603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the big prize opening time timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 604, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big prize opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the special winning opening 540. The variables stored in this way will close the special prize opening solenoid 620. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

  In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S610. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not the small hit, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S <b> 606, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the special winning opening open count upper limit. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the large winning opening opening count value stored in the main RAM 103 with the upper winning opening opening count upper limit value or more, and the main winning opening opening count value is determined as the large winning opening opening count. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value is exceeded. If the main CPU 101 determines that the winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the winning opening opening upper limit, the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening opening count value is not greater than or equal to the winning opening opening count upper limit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S607.

  In step S <b> 607, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

  In step S608, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

  In step S <b> 609, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 610, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

  In step S611, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

In step S <b> 612, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an interval end display command per special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, when the hit determination result is a big hit, a big hit end display command is set, and when the hit determination result is a small hit, a small hit end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small hit end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit end interval processing) executed in step S107 in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the process proceeds to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), this subroutine ends.

  In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the main CPU 101 sets the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the hit end interval to “0”. It is determined whether or not. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S702, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 103 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to a step S703.

  In step S <b> 703, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting control data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol and the gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, a game state such as a normal game state or a probability change state is set as control data. Further, the main CPU 101 sends an end command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Special symbol game end processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in step S108 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the process proceeds to step S711. When it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S711, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Description of sub-control circuit operation]
Hereinafter, processing of the sub control circuit 200 will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and the sub CPU 201 performs various processes such as a display process.

[Sub control main processing]
First, a sub-control main process performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 in response to power-on. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

  In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs a random value update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates random number values stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, effect determination random value, jackpot effect determination random value, stop symbol determination random value, etc.). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

  In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1105.

  In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

  In the display control circuit 204, when data is received from the sub CPU 201, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 performs various kinds of data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and production image data based on the received data. Are read from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read from the image data ROM and displays them on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound / lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs control of sound generated from the speaker 24 and light emission control of various lamps such as the lamp 25. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

  In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs an accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operation (mechanical operation or lighting operation) of the movable accessory unit 57 via the accessory control circuit 207. For the control of the operation of the movable accessory unit 57 performed by the sub CPU 201, the control of the operations of the first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83 is performed. Is included. When this process is finished, the process is transferred again to the random value update process in step S1102.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 21 is being performed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves values used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

  In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer such as a round effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

  In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect button switch input detection process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

  In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S201 to each register. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 21 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and a command interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, the command interruption process performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves values used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for storing the received command in the buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S1301 to each register. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (command analysis processing) performed in step S1103 in FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25.

  In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command, it moves the process to step S1402. On the other hand, when determining that there is no reception command, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for reading the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads a command stored in the reception buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a big prize winning command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a big prize opening prize command, it moves the process to step S1404. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a big prize opening prize command, it moves the process to step S1405.

  In step S <b> 1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the big hit winning number counter and the total winning number counter. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data relating to the number of winning balls (the number of acquired gaming balls) acquired by the player due to the winning of a gaming ball in the special winning opening 540. Note that the big win winning number counter and the total winning number counter start counting (counting) with the start of the big hit game as a break. Thus, each time a big hit or a small hit is made, data relating to the number of winning balls is acquired. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special symbol designation command, it moves the process to step S1406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special symbol designation command, it moves the process to step S1407.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1408. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1409.

  In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol, and the extracted effect determination random number. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command). In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the process proceeds to step S1410. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1411.

  In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a big hit start effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special winning opening opening effect display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a bonus opening opening effect display command, the process proceeds to step S1412. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not an effect display command during opening of the big prize opening, the process proceeds to step S1413.

  In step S <b> 1412, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect during the opening of the special winning opening. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is an inter-round display command, it moves the process to step S1414. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not an inter-round display command, it moves the process to step S1415.

  In step S <b> 1414, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining effects between rounds. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a hit end display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit end display command, it moves the process to step S1416. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit end display command, it moves the process to step S1417.

  In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect at the end of the big hit. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 1417, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a time reduction end command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a time reduction end command, it moves the process to step S1418. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a time saving end command, it moves the process to step S1419.

  In step S <b> 1418, the sub CPU 201 performs control such as clearing the short time flag and ending the short time display. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to the received other command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  Note that the effect pattern determination process of step S1408, the hit start effect determination process of step S1410, the inter-round effect determination process of step S1414, and the hit end effect determination process of step S1416 will be described later. This is described in detail in the description of the game.

<Pachinko gaming machine according to second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

[Game board]
First, the game board 17 used in the second embodiment will be described.

  The game board 17 used in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is another example of the game board 17 shown in FIG. The game board 17 shown in FIG. 26 is largely different from the game board 17 shown in FIG. 3 mainly in that a center role 7000 is used instead of the center role 42 and the game ball distribution device 5400 (first starting port 5442). And the starting port unit 7070 (starting port 7071a and base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b (first starting port)), and the movable role unit 57 (first movable role unit (presentation device 2400) , A second movable auditors unit 8000 and a second movable auditors unit 8000 instead of the second movable auditors unit 82 and the third movable auditors unit 83). The details of the configuration of the center accessory 7000, the starting port unit 7070, the first movable accessory unit 6000, and the second movable accessory unit 8000 will be described later.

[Description of main control circuit operation]
Hereinafter, processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) in the second embodiment will be described.

  The processing performed by the main control circuit 100 according to the second embodiment is largely different from the processing according to the first embodiment in the main processing.

[Main processing]
The main process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

  In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random value counter, the rendering condition selection random value counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

  In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, an opening time timer for the special winning opening 540, and an opening time timer for the communication hole 7031 to be described later. Do. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S7000.

  In step S7000, the main CPU 101 performs a distribution device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for turning on the solenoid 7250 based on a timer for opening the communication hole 7031. Details of this process will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination result is a win according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. The processing to do is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. Details of this process will be described later.

  In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a win according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 49 a, and performs a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

  In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processes in step S13 and step S14. Then, a process of storing a control signal for driving the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and the normal symbol display unit 71. Thus, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 performs variable display and stop display of the special symbol based on the received control signal. Moreover, the normal symbol display part 71 carries out the variable display and stop display of a normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

  In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (for example, the calling device or the hall computer). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the special winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second start opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

  In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

  In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 receives game balls in various winning holes (specifically, the big winning hole 540, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440, and the general winning ports 53, 54, and 450). It is determined whether or not When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has won at various winning ports, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the win to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S7001.

  In step S7001, the main CPU 101 performs a fraud detection process. The details of the fraud detection processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again and repeats the process from step S11 to step S19.

  As described above, in the main process in the second embodiment, unlike the main process in the first embodiment, the process shown in step S7000 is performed between the timer update process shown in step S12 and the special symbol control process shown in step S13. A distribution device control process is performed.

[Distributor control processing]
The subroutine (distribution device control processing) performed in step S7000 in FIG. 27 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In step S7010, the main CPU 101 determines whether the solenoid 7250 is in the energized state (excited state). When determining that the solenoid 7250 is in the energized state (“YES” in step S7010), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S7013. On the other hand, when determining that the solenoid 7250 is not in the energized state (“NO” in step S7010), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S7011.

  In step S7011, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the opening timing. Here, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is set so that the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are always alternately repeated. When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the opening timing (“YES” in step S7011), the process proceeds to step S7012. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is not the opening timing (that is, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the closing timing) (“NO” in step S7011), this subroutine ends. I do.

  In step S7012, the main CPU 101 performs a solenoid excitation process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for turning on the solenoid 7250. As a result, the solenoid 7250 is in an energized state (excited state). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S7013, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the open time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the close timing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the open time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the close timing (“YES” in step S7013), the process proceeds to step S7014. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is not the closing timing (that is, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the opening timing) (“NO” in step S7013), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. I do.

  In step S7014, the main CPU 101 performs a solenoid excitation stop process. In this process, the main CPU 101 stops outputting the control signal for turning on the solenoid 7250. As a result, the solenoid 7250 enters a non-energized state (non-energized state). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. In the present embodiment, the process of periodically exciting / de-energizing the solenoid 7250 is performed in the main process of FIG. 27, but may be performed in the system timer interrupt process of FIG. In this case, the count timer is updated for each timer interrupt, and when the count timer value satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, exceeds a predetermined value), the distribution device control process of FIG. Then, the count timer may be initialized after the execution.

[Center accessories and starting unit]
Hereinafter, the configurations of the center accessory 7000 and the starting port unit 7070 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 to 53.

  First, the configuration of the center accessory 7000 will be described in detail.

  The center role item 7000 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 can guide a game ball flowing down the game area 20 to the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 via the warp passage 7020 as described later. it can. Although details will be described later, the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment, and two (specifically, two) in the second embodiment. , The base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b and the starting port 7071a) are provided. The center role item 7000 includes a ball entrance 7010, a warp passage 7020, a crow 7100, an upper passage 7030, a game ball distribution device 7200, a stage 7040, a back ball passage 7050, and a central gutter 7060.

  First, an outline of a rolling path of a game ball guided to the starting port unit 7070 by the center role 7000 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, two types of rolling paths (“advantageous course” and “unfavorable course”) are provided for the rolling path of the game ball guided by the center role 7000. The advantageous course and the disadvantageous course are set so that the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other when the game ball passes. Specifically, the degree of advantage for the player is set to be higher when the game ball passes through the advantageous course than when the game ball passes through the disadvantageous course. The distribution of the advantageous course and the disadvantageous course through which the game ball passes is performed by the game ball distribution device 7200.

  When the shooting handle 32 is operated and a left hit is performed, the shot game ball flows down the game area 20 on the left side of the center role object 7000, and a part of the flowing game ball enters the entrance 7010. Ball. A game ball that has entered the entrance 7010 passes through the warp passage 7020, the clune 7100, and the upper passage 7030 in this order.

  A game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 is distributed to an advantageous course or a disadvantageous course by the game ball distribution device 7200 in the middle of the upper passage 7030. The game balls distributed to the disadvantageous course pass through the upper passage 7030 as they are, and are guided from the stage 7040 toward the starting port unit 7070. On the other hand, in the middle of the upper passage 7030, the game balls distributed to the advantageous course by the game ball distribution device 7200 pass through the back ball passage 7050 and the central gutter 7060 in order, and are guided toward the starting port unit 7070. You. A specific description of the rolling path of the game ball (flow of the ball) will be described later.

  Next, the details of the configuration of the entrance 7010, warp passage 7020, crune 7100, upper passage 7030, game ball distribution device 7200, stage 7040, back ball passage 7050, and central gutter 7060 provided in the center accessory 7000 will be described in detail. Will be described.

  The entrance 7010 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 is a portion configured to allow a game ball to enter. The entrance 7010 is provided near the left end in the middle part of the center accessory 7000 in the vertical direction. The entrance 7010 is provided in the game area 20 on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, in a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the game area 20 on the left side). In this way, the entrance 7010 is configured such that when the firing handle 32 is operated and a left hit is performed, a part of the game ball flowing down the left game area 20 enters.

  The warp passage 7020 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 is a passage for guiding a game ball that has entered the entrance 7010 in a lower right direction (to be described later with a cloon 7100). One end (upper left end) of the warp passage 7020 is communicated with the entrance 7010. The warp passage 7020 is formed so as to extend rightward from the entrance 7010 and then extend substantially downward. The other end (lower end) of the warp passage 7020 is formed to open rearward. An upstream passage 7021 and a downstream passage 7022 are formed in the warp passage 7020.

  The upstream passage 7021 shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 is a portion of the warp passage 7020 that is located on the upstream side (on the entrance 7010 side). The upstream passage 7021 is formed to extend in the left-right direction. The left end of the upstream passage 7021 communicates with the entrance 7010. The front side surface of the upstream passage 7021 is fitted into a part of the game board 17 in which a part of the game board 17 is cut out, and is flush with the game area 20 and is exposed to the front. Thus, the front side surface of the upstream passage 7021 forms a part of the game area 20. Further, in the game area 20, the game balls can flow not only to the left of the entrance 7010 but also to the right. Further, a portion other than the front side surface of the upstream side passage 7021 (a portion behind the front side surface) is formed so as to be located behind the front side surface of the game board 17, that is, behind the game area 20. In addition, the upstream passage 7021 is formed of a member having no permeability. Thus, when the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 7010 passes through the upstream passage 7021 of the warp passage 7020, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball. Here, the difficulty in visual recognition means that the visibility is lower than in other states, and may or may not include those that are not visible at all.

  The downstream passage 7022 shown in FIGS. 30 and 32 is a portion of the warp passage 7020 that is located on the downstream side (on the side of the clound 7100). The downstream passage 7022 is formed to extend in the up-down direction. The upper end of the downstream passage 7022 communicates with the lower end of the upstream passage 7021. The downstream passage 7022 is formed so as to extend forward from a portion communicating with the upstream passage 7021, then extend downward, and then bend backward. In this way, the downstream passage 7022 is formed in a U-shape with the rear open in a side view. The front side surface of the downstream passageway 7022 is formed so as to be located forward of the decoration provided on the front side surface of the center accessory 7000. Further, the downstream passage 7022 is formed of a member having transparency. When the game ball is guided from the upstream passage 7021 to the downstream passage 7022 in this way, the game ball passing through the downstream passage 7022 can be visually recognized by the player.

  With such a configuration of the warp passage 7020, the game ball that has entered the entrance 7010 becomes difficult to be visually recognized once by the player when passing through the upstream passage 7021, and thereafter, when passing through the downstream passage 7022. It becomes visible to the player. Thus, from the player's point of view, since the disappeared game ball suddenly appears in the entrance 7010 and is guided to the clune 7100, it is possible to give an impression as if the game ball entering the entrance 7010 has warped. it can.

  The croon 7100 shown in FIGS. 29 to 36 is a passage for guiding the game ball flowing from the warp passage 7020 to the right (an upper passage 7030 described later). The clune 7100 can have randomness in the passage (rolling) time of the game ball passing through the clune 7100. The crune 7100 is provided so as to be adjacent to the lower end of the warp passage 7020 rearward. As a result, the clune 7100 is configured to be able to receive game balls that have passed through the warp passage 7020. The crown 7100 includes a guide part 7110, a rolling part 7120, and a step part 7130.

  The guiding portion 7110 shown in FIGS. 33 to 36 is a portion for guiding the game ball flowing from the warp passage 7020 rightward (to a rolling portion 7120 described later). The guide portion 7110 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction in plan view, and is formed such that the left rear corner is formed in a round shape (see FIG. 35). The guiding portion 7110 is provided such that the left end thereof is located near the lower end of the warp passage 7020. The guiding portion 7110 includes an inflow port 7111, a bottom portion 7112, and a side wall portion 7113.

  The inflow port 7111 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is a hole (entrance) for guiding a game ball to the guiding section 7110. The inflow port 7111 is provided at a position facing the opening at the lower end of the warp passage 7020 (left end of the guiding section 7110) so that the front side of the guiding section 7110 opens. The inflow port 7111 communicates with the lower end of the downstream passage 7022 of the warp passage 7020. The inflow port 7111 is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through.

  The bottom portion 7112 shown in FIGS. 33, 35, and 36 is a portion that forms the bottom of the guide portion 7110. The bottom surface portion 7112 is configured so that a game ball can pass through the upper side surface. In addition, the upper side surface of the bottom portion 7112 is formed so as to be inclined downward and to the right. That is, the upper side surface of the bottom portion 7112 is formed in a shape capable of guiding the game ball to the right.

  The side wall portion 7113 guides the game ball flowing from the warp passage 7020. The side wall portion 7113 is formed so as to rise from the end of the bottom surface portion 7112. The side wall portion 7113 includes a front side wall portion 7113a and a rear side wall portion 7113b.

  The front side wall portion 7113a shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is formed so as to rise from the front end of the bottom surface portion 7112. The front wall portion 7113a is formed to be adjacent to the right side of the inflow port 7111. In other words, the inflow port 7111 is formed such that the left end of the front wall portion 7113a opens. The front wall portion 7113a is formed such that the height from the bottom surface portion 7112 is constant.

  The rear side wall portion 7113b shown in FIGS. 33, 35, and 36 is formed so as to rise from the rear end portion of the bottom surface portion 7112. More specifically, the rear wall portion 7113b is formed so as to rise from an end extending from the left front end to the right rear end of the bottom surface portion 7112. The rear wall portion 7113b is provided at the front end of the rear wall portion 7113a with the inflow port 7111 separated from the front wall portion 7113a. The rear wall portion 7113b is formed so that the height from the bottom surface portion 7112 is constant.

  The rolling portion 7120 is a portion in which the game ball flowing from the guiding portion 7110 is configured to roll. The rolling portion 7120 is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view (see FIG. 35). The rolling portion 7120 is provided to be adjacent to the right side of the guiding portion 7110. The rolling part 7120 includes a bottom part 7121, a guide wall 7122, and a discharge part 7123.

  The bottom portion 7121 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 36 is a portion constituting the bottom of the rolling portion 7120. The bottom surface portion 7121 is configured such that a game ball can roll on the upper surface thereof. Further, the upper side surface of the bottom portion 7121 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the center thereof. That is, the upper side surface of the bottom portion 7121 is formed in a shape capable of guiding the game ball to the central portion. The bottom surface portion 7121 is formed so as to be at a position lower than the bottom surface portion 7112 of the guide portion 7110.

  The guide wall 7122 guides the game ball so as to roll on the bottom surface portion 7121. The guide wall 7122 is formed so as to rise from the outer peripheral end of the bottom surface 7121. The guide wall 7122 is formed in a substantially annular shape (substantially partial annular shape) in plan view. Specifically, the guide wall 7122 has a connection portion with the rear wall portion 7113b (the right end of the rear wall portion 7113b) as a start point and a connection portion with the front wall portion 7113a (front wall portion) in plan view. 7113a) (the right end of 7113a). Thus, when the game ball that has flowed into the rolling portion 7120 rolls while contacting the guide wall 7122, the game ball is guided by the guide wall 7122 so as to take a circular orbit in plan view.

  In the guide wall 7122, a bulge portion 7122a for buffering a collision between the game ball and the guide wall 7122 is formed near the start point (connection portion with the rear wall portion 7113b). As shown in FIGS. 33 and 35, the bulging portion 7122a is formed to bulge rearward from the rear wall portion 7113b in plan view. That is, the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 is basically formed to have the same shape as the outer peripheral surface of the bottom portion 7121 in a plan view, whereas the bulge portion 7122a is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bottom portion 7121 in a plan view. It is formed so as to be located radially outward.

  The discharging unit 7123 is a part configured to be able to discharge the game balls rolling the rolling unit 7120 to the outside. The discharge portion 7123 is formed at the center of the bottom portion 7121. The discharge portion 7123 is formed to protrude downward from the bottom surface portion 7121. The discharge portion 7123 is formed in an inverted conical shape whose diameter decreases downward (see FIGS. 34 and 36). A discharge hole 7123a is formed in the discharge section 7123.

  The discharge hole 7123a is formed at the center of the discharge portion 7123. The discharge hole 7123a is formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases as it goes downward (see FIGS. 34 and 36). The discharge hole 7123a is formed to have a size capable of discharging the game ball.

  The step portion 7130 shown in FIGS. 33, 35, and 36 is a portion provided at a connection portion between the bottom portion 7112 of the guide portion 7110 and the bottom portion 7121 of the rolling portion 7120, and the bottom portion 7112 of the guide portion 7110. This is a wall formed by lowering the bottom part 7121 of the rolling part 7120. The height of the step portion 7130 is formed to be equal to or less than the radius of the game ball (see FIG. 49). The step portion 7130 is formed from the end point of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the front wall portion 7113a) to the start point of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the rear wall portion 7113b). The step portion 7130 is formed in a partial annular shape having the same diameter as the guide wall 7122 (the portion excluding the bulge portion 7122a) in plan view. As a result, the game ball rolling beyond the end point of the guide wall 7122 takes a trajectory that is substantially the same as the circular trajectory that has rolled so far.

  The upper passage 7030 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 and FIG. 41 is a passage for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge hole 7123a of the clune 7100 to the right (back ball passage 7050). The upper passage 7030 is formed so as to extend substantially to the right from below the crew 7100. The left end of the upper passage 7030 is communicated in the up-down direction with the discharge hole 7123a of the crune 7100. The upper passage 7030 is formed so as to be inclined downward and to the right. On the front and rear side walls of the upper passage 7030, a plurality of projections 7030a (two or three in this embodiment) are formed, each projecting toward the center of the passage. The front and rear protruding portions 7030a are formed at positions shifted from each other in the front-rear direction (positions not opposed to each other). Thus, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 moves to the downstream side while colliding with the front and rear protruding portions 7030a. As described above, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 collides with the front and rear protrusions 7030a, so that the moving (rolling) speed is reduced and the moving (rolling) time has randomness. It will be. A communication hole 7031 is formed in the upper passage 7030.

  The communication hole 7031 shown in FIGS. 32 and 41 is a portion serving as an entrance for guiding a game ball to an “advantageous course” described later. The communication hole 7031 is formed so as to vertically pass through the upper passage 7030. The communication hole 7031 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The communication hole 7031 is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass. The communication hole 7031 is formed substantially at the center of the upper passage 7030. More specifically, the communication hole 7031 is formed downstream of the front and rear projections 7030a.

  Although details will be described later, the communication hole 7031 is opened and closed at a predetermined timing by the movable piece 7220 of the game ball sorting device 7200. When the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220, the upper side surface of the movable piece 7220 forms a part of the upper passage 7030. In this manner, when the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 reaches the right end (downstream end) from the left end through the movable piece 7220. On the other hand, when the communication hole 7031 is opened by the movable piece 7220, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 falls from the communication hole 7031 and does not reach the right end of the upper passage 7030.

  In this way, the game ball that has not fallen from the communication hole 7031 (that is, the game ball that has reached the right end of the upper passage 7030) is distributed to the disadvantageous course. On the other hand, a game ball that has fallen from the communication hole 7031 (that is, a game ball that has not reached the right end of the upper passage 7030) is distributed to the advantageous course.

  The game ball distribution device 7200 shown in FIGS. 31, 32, and 37 to 41 is for distributing game balls flowing down the game area 20 to a plurality of paths. Specifically, the game ball distribution device 7200 converts a game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 (from among the game balls flowing down the game area 20 into the ball 7010) into an advantageous course or a disadvantageous course. Can be sorted. As described above, the game balls distributed to the advantageous course pass through the advantageous course, and thereby the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 (more specifically, of the base plate side favorable forward path 7072b and the starting port 7071a). , It is possible to reliably win the baseboard-side advantageous forward path 7072b). On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the disadvantageous course pass through the disadvantageous course, and thereby the starting ball of the starting port unit 7070 (more specifically, of the starting side 7072b and the starting port 7071a of the base plate side advantageous forward path 7071a). It may be possible to win the mouth 7071a) (that is, it is uncertain whether to win). Further, in the present embodiment, the player who wins the plateboard-side advantageous forward path 7072b (when passing through the advantageous course) at the two first starting ports becomes the starting port 7071a (when passing through the disadvantageous course). It is set so that more prize balls can be obtained than when a prize is won. In this way, the setting is such that when the game balls are distributed to the advantageous course, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous course. The game ball distribution device 7200 is provided below the upper passage 7030. The game ball distribution device 7200 includes a base 7210, a movable piece 7220, a flapper 7230, a metal piece 7240, a solenoid 7250, and a cover 7260.

  For convenience of explanation, FIG. 40 shows the base portion 7210 and the cover portion 7260, and FIG. 41 omits the base portion 7210.

  The base portion 7210 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is a portion constituting the left portion of the outer periphery of the game ball sorting device 7200. The base portion 7210 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open right side. The base part 7210 is fixed to the lower rear part of the center part 7000.

  The movable piece 7220 shown in FIGS. 37 to 41 opens and closes the communication hole 7031. Here, the state in which the communication hole 7031 is opened means that the game ball is allowed to pass through the communication hole 7031 (to the extent that the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 falls from the communication hole 7031). Refers to the state. In addition, the state in which the communication hole 7031 is closed means a state in which the game ball cannot pass through the communication hole 7031 (the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 does not drop from the communication hole 7031). This does not mean that the communication hole 7031 is limited to being completely closed. When the movable piece 7220 opens the communication hole 7031, the game ball is guided to the “advantageous course”. On the other hand, when the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031, the game ball is guided to the “unfavorable course”. The details of the flow of the game ball passing through the "advantageous course" and the "unfavorable course" will be described later.

  The movable piece 7220 is provided on the right side of the base portion 7210. The movable piece 7220 includes a movable piece upper part 7221 and a movable piece lower part 7222. Hereinafter, the shape will be described based on the state in which the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031.

  The movable piece upper portion 7221 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a portion that constitutes the upper portion of the movable piece 7220, and is a portion that opens and closes the communication hole 7031. The movable piece upper part 7221 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and is provided so that a longitudinal direction thereof is oriented in the front-rear direction. The movable piece upper portion 7221 is provided so as to be located immediately below the communication hole 7031 (to close the communication hole 7031).

  The movable piece lower part 7222 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a part constituting the lower part of the movable piece 7220. The movable piece lower part 7222 is formed integrally with the movable piece upper part 7221. The movable piece lower part 7222 is formed to extend substantially downward from the rear end of the movable piece upper part 7221. The movable piece lower part 7222 is formed so as to bend forward and downward (in a diagonal direction) in the middle thereof. A through hole is formed in the middle of the movable piece lower part 7222 in the left-right direction through the movable piece lower part 7222, and the first pin 7211 fixed to the base part 7210 is inserted into the through hole. Thus, the movable piece 7220 is supported by the base 7210 so as to be able to swing around the axis of the first pin 7211. A long hole 7222a is formed in the movable piece lower part 7222.

  The long hole 7222a is formed so as to penetrate the lower part of the movable piece lower part 7222 in the left-right direction. The long hole 7222a is formed such that the longitudinal direction thereof is oriented in the direction in which the movable piece lower portion 7222 extends (in a diagonal direction from the lower front to the upper rear) in a side view.

  The flapper 7230 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a member for transmitting a driving force to the movable piece 7220. The flapper 7230 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape in plan view. The flapper 7230 is provided such that the longitudinal direction is substantially in the front-rear direction. At the rear end of the flapper 7230, a through-hole penetrating the flapper 7230 in the left-right direction is formed, and a second pin 7212 fixed to the base portion 7210 is inserted into the through-hole. The second pin 7212 is provided so as to be located slightly below the first pin 7211 (behind a solenoid 7250 described later). Thus, the flapper 7230 is supported by the base portion 7210 so as to be able to swing around the axis of the second pin 7212. The flapper 7230 is housed inside the base portion 7210. A protrusion 7231 is formed on the flapper 7230.

  41 is formed in a columnar shape protruding rightward from the front end of the flapper 7230. The protrusion 7231 is inserted into the long hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220. The diameter of the protrusion 7231 is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the long hole 7222a in the short direction.

  The flapper 7230 configured as described above tends to swing downward at its front part due to its own weight, but the swing width is limited by the projection 7231 abutting on the lower end of the long hole 7222a. At this time, the movable piece 7220 (the movable piece upper part 7221) closes the communication hole 7031.

  A metal piece 7240 shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 is a member formed of metal. The metal piece 7240 is formed by bending a plate material into an approximately L shape. The metal piece 7240 includes a flat portion 7241 and a flange portion 7242.

  The flat portion 7241 is a portion where the plate surface is directed substantially vertically. The flat portion 7241 is provided above the flapper 7230 so that the upper surface of the flat portion 7241 is exposed. The flat portion 7241 is provided between the protrusion 7231 of the flapper 7230 and the second pin 7212 which is the swing center of the flapper 7230.

  The flange portion 7242 is a portion formed to be bent downward from the left end of the flat portion 7241. The flange portion 7242 is formed so that the plate surface faces in the left-right direction. A through hole is formed in the flange portion 7242, and the metal piece 7240 is fixed to the flapper 7230 by fastening a bolt inserted into the through hole to the flapper 7230.

  The solenoid 7250 operates the movable piece 7220 by driving the flapper 7230. The solenoid 7250 is housed inside the base portion 7210 so as to be located above the flat portion 7241 of the metal piece 7240. Solenoid 7250 is provided in non-contact with metal piece 7240. When energized (excited), solenoid 7250 generates an adsorbing force for adsorbing metal piece 7240. The solenoid 7250 is provided such that the suction force is directed upward. When the solenoid 7250 enters the non-energized state (non-excited state), the generation of the attraction force is stopped.

  The flapper 7230, the metal piece 7240, and the solenoid 7250 configured as above constitute a flapper type solenoid.

  The cover portion 7260 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is a portion that constitutes the right part of the outer periphery of the game ball sorting device 7200. The cover part 7260 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open left side surface. A movable piece 7220 is housed inside the cover 7260. The cover 7260 is combined with the base 7210 to form an outer shell of the game ball sorting device 7200, and forms an accommodation space for accommodating the movable piece 7220, the flapper 7230, the metal piece 7240, and the solenoid 7250.

  A specific description of the operation of the game ball distribution device 7200 will be described later.

  The stage 7040 shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 rolls the game ball that has passed through the upper passage 7030 without falling from the communication hole 7031 so as to repeatedly reciprocate in the left-right direction. Stage 7040 forms part of the “unfavorable course”. The stage 7040 is provided in front of and below the upper passage 7030, and is formed so as to be able to guide game balls flowing from the upper passage 7030. The stage 7040 is provided such that the extending direction is in the left-right direction. The bottom surface (rolling surface) of the stage 7040 is formed in a substantially bowl shape such that the height gradually increases toward both right and left ends in front view. That is, the stage 7040 is formed so as to guide the game ball to the left and right central portions.

  Downflow ports 7041, 7042, and 7043 for letting game balls flow down are provided at substantially right and left centers of the stage 7040 so as to be arranged in the left and right direction. The middle outlet 7042 of the three outlets 7041, 7042, 7043 is formed just above the starting port 7071a of the starting port unit 7070. In this way, the game balls flowing down from the downflow port 7042 are formed so as to easily enter the starting port 7071a of the starting port unit 7070 described later. On the other hand, the right-side downflow port 7041 and the left-side downflow port 7043 are formed so that the game balls flowing down from the downflow ports 7041 and 7043 flow downward without entering the starting port 7071a.

  The back ball passage 7050 shown in FIGS. 31, 32 and 37 is a passage for guiding the game ball dropped from the communication hole 7031 to the right (central gutter 7060). The back ball passage 7050 forms part of an advantageous course. The back ball passage 7050 is formed so as to extend rightward from below the communication hole 7031. The back ball passage 7050 is formed so as to be inclined to the lower right. The left end of the back ball passage 7050 communicates with the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030 in the vertical direction through the movable piece 7220. The back ball passage 7050 is arranged on the rear side of the lower part of the center role object 7000. In this way, the game ball passing through the back ball passage 7050 is formed invisible to the player. A cutout 7051 is formed in the back ball passage 7050.

  The cutout portion 7051 shown in FIG. 37 is formed by cutting out the bottom surface of the back ball passage 7050. The notch 7051 is formed at the right front of the back ball passage 7050. The notch 7051 is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through.

  The central gutter 7060 shown in FIG. 29 to FIG. 32, FIG. 37, FIG. 42, and FIG. . Further, the central gutter 7060 collects game balls that have entered the starting port unit 7070 from a starting port 7071a described later. As described above, the central gutter 7060 is provided with the game ball (more specifically, the first starting port, that is, the base plate side favorable forward path 7072b) guided to the starting port unit 7070 via different paths (advantageous course or disadvantageous course). Alternatively, the game ball which has won the starting port 7071a) can be collected by the pachinko gaming machine 1. The central gutter 7060 is arranged at the lowermost part of the center role 7000 and behind the game area 20. In this way, the game ball flowing through the central gutter 7060 is formed invisible to the player. The center gutter 7060 includes a center gutter base 7061, a center gutter decoration 7064, and a center gutter cover 7065.

  The central gutter base 7061 shown in FIGS. 37, 42, and 43 constitutes a main structure of the central gutter 7060. The central gutter base 7061 is formed with an inflow port 7061a, an introduction path 7061b, a discharge port 7061c, a gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d, a gutter base side advantage passage 7061e, a disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f, and an advantage course discharge port 7061g.

  The inflow port 7061a is a hole (entrance) for allowing a game ball to enter. The inflow port 7061a is formed at the upper right end of the central gutter base 7061. The inflow port 7061a is formed in a substantially square shape in plan view with the opening side facing upward. The inflow port 7061a is formed to have a size that allows a game ball to enter. The inflow port 7061a is provided so as to be located below the notch 7051. Thereby, the inflow port 7061a is configured such that a game ball flowing down from the notch 7051 can enter the ball from above.

  The introduction path 7061b is a path for guiding a game ball that has entered the inflow port 7061a in a lower left direction. The introduction path 7061b forms a part of the “advantageous course”. The introduction path 7061b is formed to extend from the inflow port 7061a in the lower left direction.

  The discharge port 7061c shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging game balls that have passed through the introduction path 7061b to the outside. The discharge port 7061c is formed at the lower left end of the introduction path 7061b such that the opening side faces forward.

  The gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d shown in FIG. 42 forms a part of the “disadvantageous course”. The gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d is formed on the left side of the outlet 7061c so as to guide the game ball substantially downward.

  The gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e shown in FIG. 42 forms a part of the “advantageous course”. The gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e is formed on the right side of the outlet 7061c so as to guide the game ball substantially downward.

  The disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging game balls that have passed through the “disadvantageous course” to the outside. The disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f is formed at the lower end of the gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d so as to open downward.

  The advantageous course discharge port 7061g shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging game balls that have passed through the “advantageous course” to the outside. The advantageous course discharge port 7061g is formed at the lower end of the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e so as to open downward.

  The central gutter decoration 7064 shown in FIGS. 37, 42, and 43 is formed so as to cover the introduction path 7061b from the front side.

  The central gutter cover 7065 shown in FIGS. 37, 42, and 43 covers the central gutter base 7061 from the front side. The central gutter cover 7065 is formed with a gutter cover-side advantageous forward path 7065a and a gutter cover-side advantageous return path 7065b.

  The gutter cover-side advantageous outward path 7065a shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a path for guiding the game balls discharged from the outlet 7061c through the introduction path 7061b of the central gutter base 7061 in the forward direction. The gutter cover-side advantageous outward path 7065a forms a part of the “advantageous course”. The gutter cover-side advantageous outward path 7065a is formed so as to penetrate the center gutter cover 7065 in the front-rear direction. The gutter cover-side advantageous outward path 7065a is formed so that the upper part is opened. The rear end of the gutter cover-side advantageous outward path 7065a is formed so as to communicate with the outlet 7061c of the central gutter base 7061.

  The gutter cover-side advantageous return path 7065b shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a path for guiding game balls that have returned after passing through the gutter cover-side advantageous forward path 7065a and the like in the backward direction. The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b forms a part of the “advantageous course”. The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b is formed so as to penetrate the center gutter cover 7065 in the front-rear direction. The gutter cover-side advantageous return path 7065b is provided below the gutter cover-side advantageous forward path 7065a. The gutter cover-side advantageous return path 7065b is formed to be able to guide game balls to the gutter base-side advantageous passage 7061e of the central gutter base 7061.

  Next, the configuration of the starting port unit 7070 will be described in detail.

  The starting port unit 7070 shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 37, FIG. 42, and FIG. 43 is a unit body in which two first starting ports (baseboard-side advantageous forward path 7072b and starting port 7071a) are integrated. Note that, even inside the starting port unit 7070, the paths of the game balls passing through the two first starting ports are formed to be different from each other. That is, the advantageous course and the disadvantageous course are formed inside the starting port unit 7070, and the game balls entered from the two first starting ports are not mixed with each other (until they are discharged from the starting port unit 7070). Is done. The starting port unit 7070 includes a starting port decoration 7071, a starting port base plate 7072, a first proximity switch 7073, and a second proximity switch 7074.

  The starting port decoration 7071 shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a part configuring the front side of the starting port unit 7070. The starting port decoration 7071 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open rear surface. The starting port decoration 7071 includes a starting port 7071a and a decorative side advantageous passage 7071b.

  The starting port 7071a is a portion configured to allow game balls flowing down from the downflow port 7042 of the stage 7040 to enter the ball (see FIGS. 29 and 30). The starting port 7071a corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment. The starting port 7071a is provided above the starting port decoration 7071 so as to be located directly below the downflow port 7042. The starting port 7071a is formed so as to be open upward and rearward.

  The decoration-side advantageous passage 7071b shown in FIG. 43 is a passage for guiding game balls discharged from the discharge port 7061c of the central gutter base 7061 and sent to the starting port unit 7070 backward. The decorative side advantageous passage 7071b is provided below the starting opening decoration 7071. The decorative-side advantageous passage 7071b is formed such that the upward and rearward directions are opened.

  The starting port base plate 7072 shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a part constituting the rear side of the starting port unit 7070. The starting port base plate 7072 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape in plan view. The starting port base plate 7072 includes a base plate-side disadvantageous passage 7072a, a base plate-side advantageous forward path 7072b, and a base plate-side advantageous return path 7072c.

  The base plate side disadvantageous passage 7072a is a passage for guiding a game ball that has entered the starting port 7071a backward. The bedside disadvantageous passage 7072a is formed in the upper part of the starting port base plate 7072 so that the upper side, the front side, and the rear side are opened. The front end of the bedside disadvantageous passage 7072a is provided so as to communicate with the rear end of the starting port 7071a.

  The base plate-side advantageous forward path 7072b is a passage (opening) that guides the game ball that has passed through the gutter cover-side advantageous forward path 7065a to the front, and eventually to the starting port unit 7070 (decorative-side advantageous passage 7071b). . The base plate-side advantageous forward path 7072b is formed so as to penetrate the starting port base plate 7072 in the front-rear direction. The base plate-side advantageous forward path 7072b is provided below the base plate-side disadvantageous passage 7072a (at substantially the center of the starting port base plate 7072). Note that the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment.

  The base plate-side advantageous return path 7072c is a path that guides the game ball that has passed through the decoration-side advantageous path 7071b to the rear direction, and eventually guides to the central gutter 7060 (the gutter cover-side advantageous return path 7065b). The base plate side advantageous return path 7072c is formed so as to penetrate the starting port base plate 7072 in the front-rear direction. The base plate-side advantageous return path 7072c is provided below the base plate-side advantageous forward path 7072b (below the starting port base plate 7072).

  In this way, the inflow port 7061a, the introduction path 7061b, the discharge port 7061c, the gutter cover side advantageous forward path 7065a, the base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b, the decorative side advantageous path 7071b, the base plate side advantageous return path 7072c, and the gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b. The “advantageous course” is constituted by the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e, the advantageous course discharge port 7061g and the like. On the other hand, the stage 7040, the start port 7071a, the disadvantageous passage 7072a on the base plate side, the disadvantageous passage 7061d on the gutter base side, the disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f, and the like constitute a “disadvantage course”.

  The first proximity switch 7073 shown in FIG. 42 is a sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting port 7071a (first starting port). The first proximity switch 7073 is arranged on a disadvantageous course. That is, the first proximity switch 7073 can detect that the game ball has passed the “unfavorable course”. The first proximity switch 7073 is arranged inside the central gutter 7060. The first proximity switch 7073 is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface facing up and down. The first proximity switch 7073 is provided in the middle of the gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d. The first proximity switch 7073 includes a through hole 7073a.

  The through hole 7073a is a substantially circular hole as viewed from the front, which penetrates the first proximity switch 7073 in the up-down direction. The through hole 7073a has an inner diameter that allows a game ball to pass through.

  The first proximity switch 7073 thus configured is configured to form a magnetic field in the through hole 7073a and to detect an eddy current generated when a game ball passes through the magnetic field (the through hole 7073a), for example. You. Based on the eddy current detection result, the first proximity switch 7073 determines that the game ball has entered the starting port 7071a (first starting port) (that the game ball has passed the disadvantageous course). ) Is detected. Note that the first proximity switch 7073 corresponds to the first starting port switch 5472 in the first embodiment.

  The second proximity switch 7074 shown in FIG. 42 is a sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the baseboard-side advantageous forward path 7072b (first starting port). The second proximity switch 7074 is located on the advantageous course. That is, the second proximity switch 7074 can detect that the game ball has passed the “advantageous course”. The second proximity switch 7074 is formed in the shape of a flat plate with its plate surface facing up and down. The second proximity switch 7074 is provided in the middle of the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e. The second proximity switch 7074 has a through hole 7074a.

  The through-hole 7074a is a substantially circular hole in a front view penetrating the second proximity switch 7074 in the up-down direction. The through hole 7074a has an inner diameter that allows a game ball to pass through.

  The second proximity switch 7074 configured as described above is configured to form, for example, a magnetic field in the through hole 7074a and detect an eddy current generated when a game ball passes through the magnetic field (the through hole 7074a). You. Based on the eddy current detection result, the second proximity switch 7074 causes the first proximity switch 7073 to determine that the game ball has entered the board-side advantageous forward path 7072b (first starting port) (the “advantageous course”). Passed). Note that the second proximity switch 7074 corresponds to the first starting port switch 5472 in the first embodiment.

  Thus, in the starting port unit 7070, the starting port and the switch corresponding to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment are two pairs (specifically, the starting port 7071a and the first proximity switch 7073, A base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b and a second proximity switch 7074). In this way, the starting port 7071a and the base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b each provide an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) of a game ball, and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit. An opportunity is displayed to cause the display on the second symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74.

  Next, the operation of the game ball distribution device 7200 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 40, 41, 44, and 45.

  When the solenoid 7250 is in the non-energized state (non-excited state), the movable piece 7220 is located immediately below the communication hole 7031 as shown in FIGS. Thus, the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220.

  When the solenoid 7250 is energized (excited), it generates an upward attractive force. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, solenoid 7250 sucks metal piece 7240 upward by the attraction force. Then, the flapper 7230 swings clockwise around the axis of the second pin 7212 in a left side view. That is, the front part of the flapper 7230 swings upward.

  Then, the protrusion 7231 of the flapper 7230 presses the lower part (front part) of the movable piece 7220 upward and forward while sliding the long hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220 from the other side (lower side) to one side (upper side). I do. Accordingly, the movable piece 7220 swings clockwise around the axis of the first pin 7211 in a left side view. Then, the movable piece upper part 7221 of the movable piece 7220 swings (moves) backward and downward, and separates from the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030. Thereby, the movable piece upper part 7221 of the movable piece 7220 opens the communication hole 7031.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 7250 is in a non-energized state (non-energized state), it does not generate any upward attraction force. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the flapper 7230 swings counterclockwise around the axis of the second pin 7212 in left side view due to its own weight. That is, the front portion of the flapper 7230 swings downward.

  Then, the protrusion 7231 of the flapper 7230 slides the long hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220 from one side (upper rear side) to the other side (lower front side), and moves the lower part (front part) of the movable piece 7220 downward. Press. Thereby, the movable piece 7220 swings counterclockwise around the axis of the first pin 7211 in a left side view. Then, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 swings (moves) forward and upward, and approaches the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030. Accordingly, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031. At this time, the upper passage 7030 and the game ball sorting device 7200 (the movable piece upper portion 7221) are in an arrangement relationship of maintaining a non-contact state with each other. Therefore, even if the game ball sorting device 7200 is in the closed state, the passage and the movable piece do not rub against each other, and dust generated by rubbing does not occur. The separating device 7200 does not malfunction.

  As described above, the movable piece 7220 swings downward (backward and downward), whereby the communication hole 7031 can be opened by being separated from the communication hole 7031. In addition, the movable piece 7220 swings upward (upward in the forward direction), whereby the communication hole 7031 can be closed close to the communication hole 7031. As described above, the closing and opening of the communication hole 7031 by the movable piece 7220 are performed with the movable piece 7220 and the communication hole 7031 hardly sliding each other. The operation of the movable piece 7220 can be performed by switching between the energized state and the non-energized state of the solenoid 7250. That is, by switching between the energized state and the non-energized state of the solenoid 7250, it is possible to switch between closing and opening the communication hole 7031.

  In this way, in the game ball sorting device 7200, the communication hole 7031 is closed and opened by swinging the movable piece 7220, and the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 can be sorted into the advantageous course or the disadvantageous course.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, when the gaming balls are allocated to the advantageous course, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the gaming balls are allocated to the disadvantageous course. Is set to Further, in the game ball distribution device 7200, since the swing of the movable piece 7220 is performed by time management using the open time timer (see the distribution device control processing shown in FIG. 28) as described above, the movable piece 7220 is moved. (In turn, closing and opening of the communication hole 7031) is always repeated at a constant timing. Therefore, for example, if the player can aim and hit the game ball at the specific timing intentionally at the communication hole 7031, the game ball distribution device 7200 does not perform appropriate distribution, and the game ball moves to the advantageous course. You will be guided.

  As described above, if the game ball distribution device 7200 does not perform appropriate distribution, the degree of advantage for the player may be intentionally increased, which is not desirable. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to give randomness to the time at which the shot game ball reaches the communication hole 7031 so that the game ball cannot intentionally reach the communication hole 7031 at a specific timing. It has a possible configuration (such as the Kruen 7100).

  Next, the flow of the game ball A that has entered the entrance 7010 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 54.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the game ball A that has entered the entrance 7010 flows down the warp passage 7020 and is guided to the clune 7100. In the present embodiment, the timing at which game balls are ejected from the clune 7100 is less likely to be constant by making the rolling time of the game balls in the clune 7100 as long as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the game ball A guided to the clune 7100 flows into the guiding portion 7110 via the inflow port 7111. Here, the bottom surface portion 7112 is inclined downward and to the right (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the game ball A guided to the guiding portion 7110 moves rightward on the bottom portion 7112. At this time, since the game ball sent from the warp passage 7020 is given backward momentum, in many cases, the game ball moves rightward on the bottom surface portion 7112 while abutting on the rear wall portion 7113b.

  The game ball A moves rightward while contacting the rear wall portion 7113b, and is guided to the rolling portion 7120. Specifically, the game ball A is guided to a start point portion of the guide wall 7122 (a connection portion with the rear wall portion 7113b).

  The game ball A guided to the starting point of the guide wall 7122 rolls on the bottom surface 7121 clockwise in a plan view while abutting on the guide wall 7122. Then, the game ball A reaches the end point portion of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the front wall portion 7113a).

  As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball A reaching the end point portion of the guide wall 7122 rolls clockwise in plan view while abutting on the corner of the step 7130. At this time, as shown in FIG. 49, the game ball A rolls while abutting on the corner of the step 7130 with a part thereof protruding toward the guiding portion 7110.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 50, if the bulging portion 7122a is not provided on the guide wall 7122, the game ball A has its protruding portion B (see FIG. 49) near the starting point of the step portion 7130. Then, it collides with the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 at an angle nearly perpendicular. Then, the game ball A is repelled by the guide wall 7122 and is discharged to the outside from the discharge hole 7123a without rolling on the bottom surface portion 7121. For this reason, the rolling time of the game ball A is shortened, and the role of the clune 7100 in that the rolling time of the game ball A has randomness cannot be fulfilled.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the bulge portion 7122a is provided at the starting point of the guide wall 7122, it is possible to prevent the game ball A from colliding with the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 at an almost perpendicular angle. Can be. That is, the game ball A smoothly abuts the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122. Therefore, it is possible to buffer the collision of the game ball A with the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122. Accordingly, the game ball A is not hit by the guide wall 7122, and thus the game ball A can be prevented from being immediately discharged from the discharge hole 7123a to the outside.

  The bottom surface portion 7121 is inclined downward toward the center (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the game ball A rolling on the bottom surface portion 7121 moves toward the center while rotating clockwise in plan view, and is guided to the discharge portion 7123.

  The game ball A guided to the discharge portion 7123 is guided downward while rotating clockwise in plan view while abutting on the inner wall of the discharge hole 7123a. Here, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, the rotation speed does not easily decrease. For this reason, the maximum time until the game ball A is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a can be lengthened. As described above, by making the rolling time of the game ball in the clune 7100 as long as possible, it becomes difficult to discharge the game ball from the clune 7100 at a constant timing. That is, since the passing (rolling) time of the game ball passing through the clune 7100 can have randomness, even if the player hits the ball, the communication ball 7031 is intentionally inserted at a specific timing. Cannot be reached.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the game ball discharged from the discharge hole 7123a is received by the upper passage 7030. Since the upper passage 7030 is inclined downward to the right, the game ball is guided to the right by the upper passage 7030. The game ball moving in the upper passage 7030 reaches a portion where the communication hole 7031 is provided.

  Here, when the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220 of the game ball distribution device 7200, the game ball does not fall from the communication hole 7031 and moves rightward in the upper passage 7030 as it is, You will be guided to the disadvantaged course. On the other hand, when the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220, the game ball falls from the communication hole 7031 and is guided to the “advantageous course”.

  Hereinafter, the flow of the game ball passing through the “unfavorable course” will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the game ball that has just moved rightward in the upper passage 7030 without falling from the communication hole 7031 is guided to the right end of the stage 7040. Since the right end of the stage 7040 is inclined downward and to the left, the game ball that has flowed into the stage 7040 is guided to the left. The game ball flows down from one of the outlets 7041, 7042, and 7043 depending on conditions such as the speed of moving the stage 7040.

  Here, when the game ball flows down from the right-side downflow port 7041 and the left-side downflow port 7043, the game ball flows downward without entering the starting port 7071a of the starting port unit 7070. In this case, the player cannot obtain a prize ball.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flows down from the middle downflow port 7042, the game ball enters the start port 7071a of the start port unit 7070.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the game ball that has entered the starting port 7071a is guided backward by the base plate side disadvantageous passage 7072a, and is sent to the central gutter 7060. Then, the game ball is guided leftward and downward by the gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d, and passes through the through hole 7073a of the first proximity switch 7073. Thereby, the main CPU 101 can confirm that the game ball has passed the “unfavorable course”. When confirming that the game ball has passed the “unfavorable course”, the main CPU 101 plays a predetermined number of prize balls. The game ball that has passed through the first proximity switch 7073 is guided downward as it is, and is discharged to the outside from the disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f.

  Next, the flow of the game ball passing through the “advantageous course” will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the game ball flowing down from the communication hole 7031 enters the inlet 7061a of the central gutter base 7061. Then, the game ball passes through the introduction path 7061b and is discharged from the discharge port 7061c.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the game balls discharged from the discharge port 7061c are guided forward by the gutter cover side advantageous forward path 7065a, and are sent to the starting port unit 7070. The game ball sent to the starting opening unit 7070 passes through the base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b, and is sent to the starting opening decoration 7071. The game ball sent to the starting port decoration 7071 is guided backward by the decoration-side advantageous passage 7071b (see FIG. 54).

  Then, the game ball passes through the base plate side advantageous return path 7072c and is sent to the central gutter 7060. Then, the game ball passes through the gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b and is sent to the central gutter base 7061. The game ball sent to the central gutter base 7061 is guided rightward and downward by the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e, and passes through the through hole 7074a of the second proximity switch 7074 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, the main CPU 101 can confirm that the game ball has passed the “advantageous course”. When confirming that the game ball has passed the “advantageous course”, the main CPU 101 plays a larger number of prize balls than the “unfavorable course”. The game ball that has passed through the second proximity switch 7074 is guided downward as it is, and is discharged to the outside from the advantageous course discharge port 7061g.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by operating the movable piece 7220 of the game ball sorting device 7200, the game balls can be sorted into the “advantageous course” or the “unfavorable course”. As a drive source of the movable piece 7220, a flapper type solenoid in which the power generation unit (solenoid 7250) and the drive unit (flapper 7230 and metal piece 7240) are not in contact is used, so that the contact surface between the solenoid body and the plunger is cut off. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as rattling and dust generated due to shaving of members hardening the plunger from expanding and contracting.

  When the solenoid 7250 is not energized, the flapper 7230 shifts to a position where the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031, but shifts to this position by its own weight without using an urging means such as a spring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the spring is deteriorated and the spring cannot be returned to the retracted position.

  In the present embodiment, the solenoid 7250 is constantly driven (the opening timing is set to 0.5 seconds and the closing timing is set to 1.5 seconds so as to be always repeated alternately). Such a setting is a state in which a malfunction of the movable piece 7220 easily occurs. However, since the game ball distribution device 7200 is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the movable piece 7220 from occurring.

[First movable character unit]
The first movable accessory unit 6000 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 73.

  The first movable auditors unit 6000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The first movable accessory unit 6000 is installed on the game board 17. The first movable auditors unit 6000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the movement of the movable body at a position on the game board 17 where the player can visually recognize the movable body. The first movable accessory unit 6000 includes a first movable mechanism 6100, a first movement control means 6120, a second movable mechanism 6200, a second movement control means 6260, a third movable mechanism 6300, and a third movement control means 6340. are doing.

  The movable body is a part that resembles an arm with a hand or a wrist and is driven in the first movable auditors unit 6000 (for example, a wrist part 6220, a back part 6230, an index finger 6310, a ring finger described later). Part 6320 and little finger part 6330). The first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 have the above-described movable body and drive the movable body.

  The movement of the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 is controlled by a first movement control unit 6120, a second movement control unit 6260, and a third movement control unit 6340, which will be described later. The first movable mechanism 6100, first movement control means 6120, second movable mechanism 6200, second movement control means 6260, third movable mechanism 6300, and third movement control means 6340 will be described later in detail.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 from FIG. 55 to FIG. 61, the state in which the movement of the first movable auditors unit 6000 is not controlled is the initial state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, FIGS. 68 and 69, and FIGS. 71 to 73, the state in which the movement of the first movable auditors unit 6000 is controlled is defined as the effect state. In FIGS. 57 to 64 and FIGS. 67 to 69, an elevating cover member 6124, a wrist portion 6220, and a back portion 6230, which will be described later, are omitted.

  The first movement control means 6120 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 controls the movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 on the game board 17 so as to move up and down in the up-down direction. The first movement control means 6120 mainly includes a lifting base member 6121, a lifting cover member 6124, a lifting motor 6130, a lifting mechanism 6140, a lifting assisting member 6150, and a lock member 6160. Hereinafter, the configuration of the first movement control unit 6120 will be described based on the initial state.

  57 to 59, the lifting base member 6121 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with a lifting motor 6130 and a lifting mechanism 6140 described later. The elevating base member 6121 is fixed to the game board 17. The elevation base member 6121 has a substantially inverted L-shape (a shape in which the L-shape is turned upside down) in a front view (see FIG. 62). The elevating base member 6121 mainly includes a main body portion 6122 and a holding portion 6123.

  The main body 6122 is provided with a lifting motor 6130 and a lifting mechanism 6140 described below. The main body 6122 is formed in a long shape along the vertical direction. The main body 6122 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface directed in the front-rear direction.

  The holding unit 6123 holds the first movable mechanism 6100 in an initial state. The holding portion 6123 protrudes rightward from the right end of the main body 6122. The holding portion 6123 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction.

  The lifting cover member 6124 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 covers the main body 6122 and a lifting mechanism 6140 described below. The elevating cover member 6124 is fixed to the main body 6122. The elevating cover member 6124 and the main body 6122 constitute a housing for accommodating an elevating mechanism 6140 described later.

  The elevating motor 6130 is a driving source for moving the first movable mechanism 6100. The elevating motor 6130 is fixed to the upper end of the main body 6122 of the elevating base member 6121. As shown in FIG. 61, the elevating motor 6130 is provided such that the output shaft 6131 penetrates the main body 6122 back and forth and projects rearward.

  The lifting mechanism 6140 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 transmits the driving force generated by the lifting motor 6130 to the first movable mechanism 6100. The lifting mechanism 6140 mainly includes an output gear 6141, a first transmission gear 6142, a second transmission gear 6143, a pulley 6144, a belt 6145, and a lifting guide 6146. In FIGS. 60 and 61, the elevation base member 6121 is omitted.

  The output gear 6141 shown in FIG. 60 is for extracting the driving force of the lifting motor 6130. The output gear 6141 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 6131 of the elevating motor 6130.

  The first transmission gear 6142 is disposed substantially below the output gear 6141, and meshes with the output gear 6141. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6142 has a small diameter portion (not shown) smaller in diameter than the portion shown in FIG. 60 formed on the front side, and the small diameter portion is meshed with the output gear 6141. You. The first transmission gear 6142 rotates around the axis of the first transmission gear 6142. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6142 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the front side of the main body 6122.

  The second transmission gear 6143 is disposed substantially below the first transmission gear 6142, and meshes with the first transmission gear 6142. The second transmission gear 6143 rotates around the axis of the second transmission gear 6143. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 6143 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the front side of the main body 6122. The second transmission gear 6143 mainly includes a pulley portion 6143a.

  The pulley portion 6143a shown in FIG. 61 transmits the driving force of the elevating motor 6130 to a belt 6145 described later. The belt 6145 is wound around the pulley portion 6143a. The pulley portion 6143a is formed at the front end of the second transmission gear 6143. The pulley portion 6143a is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front centering on the axis of the second transmission gear 6143.

  A pulley 6144 shown in FIG. 62 has a belt 6145 to be described later wound thereon. The pulley 6144 is disposed below the pulley portion 6143a of the second transmission gear 6143. In this embodiment, the pulley 6144 is rotatably supported at a lower end portion of a surface facing the front side of the main body portion 6122 of the elevating base member 6121.

  The belt 6145 is formed in an endless shape, and is wound around the pulley portion 6143a and the pulley 6144. The belt 6145 rotates with the rotation of the pulley portion 6143a. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the belt 6145 has a rack-shaped tooth portion 6145a formed on a part of the inner peripheral surface facing the pulley portion 6143a and the pulley 6144. The tooth portion 6145a is engaged with an engagement tooth portion 6112a provided in a first movable mechanism 6100 described later.

  The elevating guide 6146 shown in FIGS. 59 to 62 guides the guide unit 6113 provided in the first movable mechanism 6100. The lifting guide 6146 guides the first movable mechanism 6100 in the vertical direction. The elevating guide 6146 is in the form of a vertically elongated rod. In the present embodiment, a pair of elevating guides 6146 are arranged on the main body 6122 of the elevating base member 6121 with an interval left and right.

  The lifting assisting member 6150 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 urges the first movable mechanism 6100 upward. The lift assisting member 6150 mainly includes a case 6151 and a constant load spring 6152.

  A case 6151 shown in FIGS. 58 and 60 holds a later-described constant load spring 6152 so as to be rotatable around an axis along the left-right direction. The case 6151 is fixed to the upper left end of the holding portion 6123 of the elevating base member 6121.

  The constant load spring 6152 is formed by winding a band-shaped spring around a drum whose axial direction is parallel to the left-right direction. The constant load spring 6152 is formed such that the force (torque) at which one end of the constant load spring 6152 pulled out from the drum returns is constant. One end of the constant load spring 6152 is connected to the arm 6114 of the first base member 6110 of the first movable mechanism 6100.

  A lock member 6160 shown in FIGS. 60 to 62 holds the first movable mechanism 6100 in an initial state. In the lock member 6160, a lock portion 6161 that protrudes forward in the protruding state is provided so as to be freely immersed. The lock member 6160 is provided so that the lock portion 6161 penetrates the holding portion 6123 of the elevating base member 6121 in the front-rear direction. The lock member 6160 is provided substantially at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the holding portion 6123 of the elevating base member 6121 (see FIG. 62).

  The lock member 6160 has an electric wire wound in a coil shape, and has a solenoid (not shown) that generates a magnetic field by receiving electric power. The solenoid has a plunger (not shown) urged to protrude forward by a spring member (not shown), and the plunger is connected to the lock 6161. The lock portion 6161 is immersed when the solenoid draws the plunger backward with the generation of a magnetic field due to energization. Further, the lock portion 6161 projects forward due to the urging force of the spring member with the release of the energization.

  The movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 shown in FIGS. 55 to 62 is controlled by the first movement control means 6120 so as to move up and down on the game board 17 in the vertical direction. The first movable mechanism 6100 mainly includes a first base member 6110.

  The first base member 6110 holds the second movable mechanism 6200 and a second movement control means 6260 described later, and is connected to the first movement control means 6120. The first base member 6110 mainly includes a main body 6111, an arm 6114, and a base cover 6117.

  The main body 6111 shown in FIG. 60 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The main body section 6111 mainly includes a groove section 6112 and a guide section 6113.

  The groove 6112 shown in FIG. 60 is to which the belt 6145 of the elevating mechanism 6140 is connected. The groove 6112 is formed so as to be recessed forward on a surface facing the rear of the main body 6111. The groove 6112 is formed with an engaging tooth 6112a that engages with the tooth 6145a of the belt 6145. In this embodiment, engagement teeth 6112a are formed at the upper and lower ends of the groove 6112, respectively. The first base member 6110 is connected to the belt 6145 by the engagement of the engaging teeth 6112a with the teeth 6145a of the belt 6145.

  The guide portion 6113 shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is engaged with the elevating guide 6146 and guided vertically. The guide portion 6113 is formed on a surface facing rearward of the main body portion 6111. The vertical movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 is guided by the sliding guide portion 6113 sliding on the outer peripheral surface of the lifting guide 6146. In the present embodiment, a guide portion 6113 is provided at a position corresponding to the pair of elevating guides 6146 of the main body portion 6111.

  The arm 6114 supports the second movable mechanism 6200. The arm 6114 is provided at the upper end of the main body 6111 so as to extend rightward from the right end of the main body 6111. Further, the arm 6114 has a distal end in the extending direction extending obliquely upward and to the right. The arm 6114 mainly includes a bearing 6115 and a lock receiving portion 6116.

  The bearing 6115 is provided at the tip of the arm 6114 in the extending direction. The bearing 6115 has a substantially circular hole shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The lock receiving portion 6116 receives the lock portion 6161 of the lock member 6160. The lock receiving portion 6116 protrudes rightward from the upper end of the bearing 6115. As shown in FIG. 60, the lock receiving portion 6116 has the lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 opposed to the upper surface of the lock portion 6161 in a protruding state. When the lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 faces the upper surface of the lock portion 6161, the first movable mechanism 6100 is prevented from falling.

  The base cover 6117 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, 63 and 64 holds a rotating mechanism 6270 to be described later together with the main body 6111. The base cover 6117 is arranged on the front side of the main body 6111. The base cover 6117 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing forward and backward.

  The second movement control means 6260 shown in FIGS. 58, 63, and 64 controls the movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 on the game board 17 so that the second movable mechanism 6200 rotates (swings) around a rotation shaft 6211 described later. Is what you do. The second movement control means 6260 mainly includes a rotation motor 6261 and a rotation mechanism 6270. In the following, when describing the positional relationship of the members constituting the second movement control means 6260, as shown in FIG. 62, the first movable mechanism 6100 is in a lowered state, and the second movable mechanism 6200 The description will be made with reference to a state before the is rotated (a descending state described later).

  The rotation motor 6261 is a drive source for moving the second movable mechanism 6200. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the rotation motor 6261 is fixed to a portion below the arm 6114 on a surface facing the front side of the base cover 6117. The rotation motor 6261 is provided such that the output shaft 6262 penetrates the base cover 6117 back and forth and projects rearward.

  The rotating mechanism 6270 shown in FIGS. 63 and 64 transmits the driving force generated by the rotating motor 6261 to the second movable mechanism 6200. The rotation mechanism 6270 mainly includes an output gear 6271, a first transmission gear 6272, and a rotation arm 6273.

  The output gear 6271 extracts the driving force of the rotation motor 6261. The output gear 6271 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 6262 of the rotation motor 6261.

  The first transmission gear 6272 is disposed substantially above the output gear 6271, and meshes with the output gear 6271. The first transmission gear 6272 rotates around the axis of the first transmission gear 6272. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6272 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6117. The first transmission gear 6272 mainly includes an eccentric shaft 6272a.

  The eccentric shaft 6272a is a substantially columnar member. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a has a front end connected to a surface of the first transmission gear 6272 facing rearward. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is arranged at a position (eccentric position) away from the center of the first transmission gear 6272 by a predetermined distance in rear view. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is inserted into a first long hole 6275a described later. In the present embodiment, the eccentric shaft portion 6272a has a substantially cylindrical bush having a flange portion whose outer diameter is larger than the groove width of the first long hole 6275a so as to prevent the first long hole 6275a from coming off. It is fixed to the rear end.

  The rotating arm 6273 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-back direction. The rotation arm 6273 connects the eccentric shaft portion 6272a of the first transmission gear 6272 and a rotation pin 6212 of the second movable mechanism 6200, which will be described later. The rotating arm 6273 has a substantially inverted L shape when viewed from the rear. The rotating arm 6273 mainly includes a rotating shaft 6274, a short side 6275, and a long side 6276.

  The rotation shaft 6274 is a shaft that serves as a rotation fulcrum of the rotation arm 6273. The rotating shaft 6274 is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The rotating shaft 6274 is a substantially columnar member. In the present embodiment, the rotation shaft 6274 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6117.

  The short side 6275 is a side extending from the rotation shaft 6274 side to the first transmission gear 6272 side. A first long hole 6275a penetrating the short side portion 6275 in the front-rear direction is formed on the distal end side of the short side portion 6275 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction). The eccentric shaft portion 6272a of the first transmission gear 6272 is inserted into the first long hole 6275a. The first long hole 6275a is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the short side portion 6275.

  The long side 6276 is a side extending from the rotation shaft 6274 side to the second movable mechanism 6200 side. The long side 6276 is longer than the short side 6275. A second long hole 6276a penetrating the long side portion 6276 in the front-rear direction is formed on the tip side of the long side portion 6276 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction). The later-described pivot pin 6212 provided in the second movable mechanism 6200 is inserted into the second long hole 6276a. The second long hole 6276a is formed to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the long side portion 6276. The second elongated hole 6276a has a bent portion 6276b bent substantially upward at the longitudinal end side.

  The movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 is controlled by the second movement control means 6260 so that the second movable mechanism 6200 rotates (swings) around a rotation shaft 6211 described later on the game board 17. The second movable mechanism 6200 mainly includes a second base member 6210, a base cover 6213, and a fixed finger 6214.

  The second base member 6210 shown in FIGS. 63, 64, and 67 holds the third movable mechanism 6300 and a third movement control unit 6340 described later, and is connected to the second movement control unit 6260. The second base member 6210 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The second base member 6210 mainly includes a rotation shaft 6211 and a rotation pin 6212.

  The rotation shaft 6211 is a shaft serving as a rotation fulcrum of the second movable mechanism 6200. The rotating shaft 6211 is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The rotating shaft 6211 has a substantially columnar shape. The rotation shaft 6211 is provided so as to protrude rearward from a surface facing rearward of the second base member 6210. The rotating shaft 6211 is inserted into a bearing 6115 provided on the arm 6114 of the first base member 6110. In the present embodiment, the rotating shaft 6211 is inserted into the bearing 6115 via a substantially cylindrical bush.

  The rotation pin 6212 is a shaft inserted into the second long hole 6276a of the rotation arm 6273. The rotation pin 6212 is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The rotation pin 6212 has a substantially columnar shape. The rotation pin 6212 has a front end connected to a surface of the second base member 6210 facing rearward. In the present embodiment, a disc-shaped washer having a larger outer diameter than the groove width of the second long hole 6276a is fixed to the rear end of the rotation pin 6212 so as to prevent the rotation pin 6212 from coming off the second long hole 6276a. Have been.

  The base cover 6213 shown in FIGS. 65 and 67 holds an opening / closing mechanism 6350 described later together with the second base member 6210. The base cover 6213 is arranged on the front side of the second base member 6210. The base cover 6213 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the base cover 6213 forms a reflecting member 6231 of the back part 6230 and a reflecting member 6241 of the middle finger part 6240 described later. The detailed description of the base cover 6213 as the reflecting members 6231 and 6241 will be described later.

  The fixed finger part 6214 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is a part of the second movable mechanism 6200 that constitutes a part simulating a finger. The fixed finger 6214 is fixed to the second base member 6210 so as to cover the front side of the second base member 6210. The fixed finger part 6214 includes a wrist part 6220, a back part 6230, a middle finger part 6240, and a thumb part 6250.

  The wrist 6220 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 covers the left portion of the second base member 6210. The back part 6230 covers the right part of the second base member 6210. In the present embodiment, the wrist 6220 and the back part 6230 are formed integrally. Further, in the present embodiment, the vertical center of the wrist 6220 and the back part 6230 is a light transmitting part 6221 and a light transmitting part 6234 formed of a transparent member. The light transmitting portion 6221 and the light transmitting portion 6234 are formed of the same material as a lens member 6244 described later.

  The middle finger portion 6240 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, 65 and 66 projects rightward from the right end of the back portion 6230. The middle finger portion 6240 includes a reflection member 6241, a substrate 6242, a light guide member 6243, a lens member 6244, and a cover member 6245.

  The reflecting member 6241 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 is fixed to the second base member 6210. The reflecting member 6241 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-back direction. The reflecting member 6241 is formed of a member that can reflect light emitted from a light emitting unit 6242a described later. In the present embodiment, the reflection member 6241 has a substantially plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the reflecting member 6241 forms a right side portion of the base cover 6213.

  The reflecting member 6241 is provided so as to be located outside (to the right of) a right end of a substrate 6242 described later. Further, the reflecting member 6241 is on the rear side of the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 6242a on the substrate 6242 (at a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface), and can reflect light emitted from an end of a lens member 6244 described later. It is provided in a suitable position. In the present embodiment, the reflecting member 6241 has an inclined portion whose right side is inclined rearward as going to the right so that the right side end is located behind the back surface of the substrate 6242 described later. 6241a.

  The board 6242 has electronic components (functional components) mounted thereon. The substrate 6242 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front surface of the substrate 6242 is a mounting surface on which the light emitting means 6242a is mounted. The substrate 6242 is arranged on the front side of the reflection member 6241.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate 6242 has a substantially plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the substrate 6242 has substantially the same shape as the reflection member 6241 in a front view, except for the inclined portion 6241a, and is formed so as to have a smaller area than the reflection member 6241.

  The light guide member 6243 guides light emitted from the light emitting means 6242a. The light guide member 6243 is formed of a transmissive member. The light guide member 6243 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing forward and backward. The light guide member 6243 is arranged so as to cover the front side of the substrate 6242, guides light introduced from the light emitting means 6242 a in the plate surface direction inside the light guide member 6243, and guides the light to the outside of the light guide member 6243. I do. In the present embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has a substantially plate shape that is long in the left-right direction.

  The light guide member 6243 is provided so as to be located outside (to the right of) the right end of the substrate 6242 from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242. Further, the light guide member 6243 is provided on the rear side of the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242 (at a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has an inclined portion 6243a in which the right side portion is inclined rearward as going to the right so that the right end is located behind the back surface of the substrate 6242. It has been. The inclination angle of the inclined portion 6243a is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflection member 6241. In the present embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has a shape generally corresponding to the reflection member 6231 when viewed from the front.

  The lens member 6244 is arranged to cover the front side of the light guide member 6243. The lens member 6244 is formed of a transmissive member. The lens member 6244 diffuses the light guided from the light guide member 6243. The lens member 6244 is disposed so as to cover the upper side, the front side, the lower side, and the right side of the right side portion of the reflection member 6241, the substrate 6242, and the light guide member 6243, respectively.

The lens member 6244 is provided so as to be located outside (to the right of) the right end of the substrate 6242 from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242. Further, the light guide member 6243 extends to the rear side of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242 (to a position beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the right side portion (the portion surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 66) of the lens member 6244 is positioned on the right side so that the right side end is located behind the back surface of the substrate 6242. The inclined portion 6244a is inclined backward toward the rear.

  The inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 extends so as to be inclined differently from the inclined portion 6241a of the reflecting member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243. In the present embodiment, when viewed in the vertical direction, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflection member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 with respect to the horizontal plane. ing. Accordingly, the inclined portion 6241a of the reflection member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 are arranged such that the leading end side in the extending direction is close to the leading end side in the extending direction of the lens member 6244.

  The cover member 6245 is arranged so as to cover the light guide member 6243 together with the lens member 6244. The cover member 6245 is formed of an impermeable member. In this embodiment, the cover member 6245 is arranged so as to cover the upper side, the front side, and the lower side of the left side portion of the reflection member 6241, the substrate 6242, and the light guide member 6243, respectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, the back part 6230 is also provided with the same reflection member 6231, substrate 6232, and light guide member 6233 as the above-mentioned middle finger part 6240. In this embodiment, the reflecting member 6231 of the back part 6230 and the reflecting member 6241 of the middle finger part 6240 are integrally formed so as to form the base cover 6213. The reflection member 6231 of the back part 6230 constitutes a left side portion of the base cover 6213. In the present embodiment, the substrate 6232 and the light guide member 6233 of the back part 6230 are also formed integrally with the substrate 6242 and the light guide member 6243 of the middle finger part 6240, respectively.

  The thumb 6250 projects obliquely downward and to the right from the upper right end of the back 6230. The thumb part 6250 includes a reflection member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member. Note that the configuration of the reflecting member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the thumb portion 6250 is the same as that of the above-described reflective member 6241, substrate 6242, light guide member 6243, lens member 6244, and cover member 6245 of the middle finger portion 6240. Since the configuration is substantially the same except for the specific shape, a detailed description is omitted.

  The third movement control means 6340 shown in FIGS. 58 and 67 to 69 controls the movement of the third movable mechanism 6300 on the game board 17 so as to rotate (open / close). The third movement control means 6340 mainly includes an opening / closing motor 6341 and an opening / closing mechanism 6350. In the following, when describing the positional relationship of the members constituting the third movement control means 6340, the description is based on the initial state (the state shown in FIG. 67). In FIG. 67, the base cover 6213 is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  The opening / closing motor 6341 is a drive source for moving the third movable mechanism 6300. The opening / closing motor 6341 is fixed to the lower end on the left side on the surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. The open / close motor 6341 is provided such that the output shaft 6342 protrudes rightward. The output shaft 6342 rotates around an axis along the left-right direction.

  The opening and closing mechanism 6350 transmits the driving force generated by the opening and closing motor 6341 to the third movable mechanism 6300. The opening / closing mechanism 6350 mainly includes an output gear 6351, a first transmission gear 6352, a second transmission gear 6353, an upper first arm 6354, an upper second arm 6355, a lower first arm 6356, and a lower second arm 6357. I do.

  The output gear 6351 extracts the driving force of the opening / closing motor 6341. The output gear 6351 is fixed to the right end of the output shaft 6342 of the rotation motor 6261.

  The first transmission gear 6352 is disposed substantially above the output gear 6351, and meshes with the output gear 6351. The first transmission gear 6352 is disposed so as to rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the first transmission gear 6352 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. The first transmission gear 6352 transmits the rotation of the output shaft 6342 around the axis along the left-right direction as the rotation around the axis along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6352 has a small-diameter portion formed on the front side with a smaller diameter than a portion meshing with the output gear 6351, and the small-diameter portion corresponds to a second transmission gear 6353 described later. Meshed.

  The second transmission gear 6353 is disposed substantially above the first transmission gear 6352, and meshes with the first transmission gear 6352. The second transmission gear 6353 is disposed so as to rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 6353 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 6353 is formed in a substantially semicircular shape when viewed from the front.

  The upper first arm 6354 is disposed substantially to the right of the second transmission gear 6353. The upper first arm 6354 is arranged to rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the upper first arm 6354 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. The upper first arm 6354 mainly includes a gear 6354a, an arm 6354b, and a shaft 6354c.

  The gear portion 6354a is meshed with the second transmission gear 6353. The gear portion 6354a is formed in a substantially fan shape having a predetermined center angle with the axis of the upper first arm 6354 as a circle when viewed from the front. The arm portion 6354b extends obliquely upward to the right from the axis of the upper first arm 6354. The shaft portion 6354c is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The shaft portion 6354c is formed so as to protrude forward at the distal end in the extending direction of the arm portion 6354b.

  The upper second arm 6355 is disposed substantially to the right of the upper first arm 6354. The upper second arm 6355 mainly includes an arm 6355a and an index finger-side extension 6355d.

  The arm portion 6355a is connected to the upper first arm 6354. The arm portion 6355a extends obliquely downward to the right from the upper first arm 6354 side. The arm portion 6355a mainly includes a long hole 6355b and a rotating shaft 6355c.

  The long hole 6355b is formed so as to penetrate the left end of the arm 6355a in the front-rear direction. The long hole 6355b is formed so as to linearly extend a predetermined distance along the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the arm portion 6355a. The shaft portion 6354c of the upper first arm 6354 is inserted into the elongated hole 6355b, and the upper first arm 6354 and the upper second arm 6355 are connected.

  The rotation shaft 6355c is formed at the right end of the arm 6355a. The rotating shaft 6355c is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The rotation shaft 6355c serves as a rotation fulcrum of the upper second arm 6355. The rotating shaft 6355c is rotatably supported at a substantially right center in the vertical direction on the surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213.

  The index finger-side extension 6355d is to which an index finger 6310 described later is fixed. The index finger-side extension 6355d extends obliquely upward and to the right from a longitudinally intermediate portion of the arm 6355a.

  The lower first arm 6356 is disposed substantially below the upper first arm 6354. The lower first arm 6356 is disposed so as to rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction. The lower first arm 6356 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. The lower first arm 6356 mainly includes a gear portion 6356a, an arm portion 6356b, and a shaft portion 6356c.

  The gear portion 6356a is meshed with the gear portion 6354a of the upper first arm 6354. The gear portion 6354a forms an arc having a predetermined central angle with the axis of the lower first arm 6356 as the center of the circle when viewed from the front. The arm portion 6356b extends obliquely downward to the right from the axis of the lower first arm 6356. The shaft portion 6356c is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The shaft portion 6356c is formed so as to protrude forward at the distal end in the extending direction of the arm portion 6356b.

  The lower second arm 6357 is disposed substantially to the right of the lower first arm 6356. The lower second arm 6357 mainly includes an arm 6357a and a ring finger / little finger side extension 6357d.

  The arm portion 6357a is connected to the lower first arm 6356. The arm portion 6357a extends obliquely upward to the right from the lower first arm 6356 side. The arm portion 6357a mainly includes a long hole 6357b and a rotating shaft 6357c.

  The long hole 6357b is formed to penetrate the left end of the arm 6357a in the front-rear direction. The long hole 6357b is formed so as to linearly extend a predetermined distance along the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the arm portion 6357a. The shaft portion 6356c of the lower first arm 6356 is inserted into the elongated hole 6357b, and the lower first arm 6356 and the lower second arm 6357 are connected.

  The rotation shaft 6357c is formed at the right end of the arm 6357a. The rotating shaft 6357c is disposed with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The rotation shaft 6357c serves as a rotation fulcrum of the lower second arm 6357. The rotating shaft 6357c is rotatably supported at a substantially right center in the vertical direction on the surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. In the present embodiment, the rotation shaft 6357c of the lower second arm 6357 and the rotation shaft 6355c of the upper second arm 6355 are coaxially connected.

  The ring finger / little finger side extension portion 6357d is a portion to which a ring finger portion 6320 and a little finger portion 6330 described later are fixed. The ring finger / little finger side extension 6357d extends obliquely downward and to the right from an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the arm 6357a.

  The movement of the third movable mechanism 6300 is controlled by the third movement control means 6340 so as to open and close in the vertical direction on the game board 17. The third movable mechanism 6300 mainly includes an index finger 6310, a ring finger 6320, and a little finger 6330.

The index finger 6310 projects rightward from the right end of the back part 6230. The index finger 6310 is fixed to the index finger-side extension 6355d of the opening / closing mechanism 6350. The index finger 6310 includes a reflection member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member. Note that the configuration of the reflecting member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the forefinger 6310 is the same as that of the above-described reflective member 6241, substrate 6242, light guide member 6243, lens member 6244, and cover member 6245 in the middle finger portion 6240. Since the configuration is substantially the same except for the specific shape, a detailed description is omitted.

  The ring finger portion 6320 protrudes rightward from the right end of the back portion 6230. The ring finger portion 6320 is fixed to the ring finger / little finger side extension portion 6357d of the opening / closing mechanism 6350. The ring finger portion 6320 includes a reflection member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member. The configuration of the reflection member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the ring finger portion 6320 is the same as that of the reflection member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 of the middle finger portion 6240 described above. Since the configuration is substantially the same except for the specific shape, a detailed description is omitted.

  The little finger part 6330 projects rightward from the right end of the back part 6230. The little finger portion 6330 is fixed to the ring finger / little finger side extension portion 6357d of the opening / closing mechanism 6350. The little finger portion 6330 includes a reflection member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member. The configuration of the reflecting member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the little finger portion 6330 is the same as that of the above-described reflective member 6241, substrate 6242, light guide member 6243, lens member 6244, and cover member 6245 of the middle finger portion 6240. Since the configuration is substantially the same except for the specific shape, a detailed description is omitted.

  Hereinafter, the movement control of the first movable auditors unit 6000 configured as described above will be described. In the following, a description will be given of a movement control in which the first movable auditors unit 6000 in the initial state is set to the effect state.

  In the initial state shown in FIG. 70, the first movable mechanism 6100 is located above the liquid crystal display device 16 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the first movable mechanism 6100 is arranged behind the upper part of the center accessory 7000. In the present embodiment, the first movable mechanism 6100 is configured to be hidden behind the decorative member 56 disposed on the upper part of the game board 17 and to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  First, the first movement control by the first movement control means 6120 will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, when the lifting / lowering motor 6130 is driven, the second transmission gear 6143 rotates clockwise around the axis via the output gear 6141 and the first transmission gear 6142 meshing with each other. .

  The rotation of the second transmission gear 6143 is transmitted to the pulley 6143a of the second transmission gear 6143 and the belt 6145 wound around the pulley 6144, and the belt 6145 rotates clockwise in rear view. Accordingly, the first movable mechanism 6100 connected to the belt 6145 moves downward (linearly moves).

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the first movement control, the restriction on the downward movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 by the lock member 6160 is released. The lock member 6160 is controlled so that the lock portion 6161 is immersed in the first movement control. Thereby, the restriction of the lock portion 6161 on the lock receiving portion 6116 provided in the first movable mechanism 6100 is released, and the first movable mechanism 6100 can move downward. Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of the first movement control, the first movable mechanism 6100 moves downward against the upward urging force of the rising assisting member 6150 by the constant load spring 6152. That is, the game board 17 moves (falls) from top to bottom via the left area (first movement path) of the game board 17. That is, the first movement path is the path of the first movable mechanism 6100 that moves as described above.

  By performing the movement control as described above, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 71, the first movable mechanism 6100 is in the descending state, which is one mode of the effect state. In the descending state, as shown in FIG. 71, the first movable mechanism 6100 is located on the lower side in the center accessory 7000. In the descending state, the first movable mechanism 6100 is disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the center role object 7000. In the descending state, an area of the first moving path through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed (an area above the first movable mechanism 6100 in the descending state) is empty.

  Next, the second movement control by the second movement control means 6260 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the rotation motor 6261 is driven, the first transmission gear 6272 rotates around the axis via the output gear 6271 meshing with each other. With the rotation of the first transmission gear 6272, the eccentric shaft portion 6272a of the first transmission gear 6272 rotates around the axis of the first transmission gear 6272.

  The eccentric shaft 6272a moves in the first long hole 6275a of the rotating arm 6273 through which the eccentric shaft 6272a is inserted. Along with this, the rotating arm 6273 rotates around the rotating shaft 6274 counterclockwise in rear view. With the rotation of the rotation arm 6273, the rotation pin 6212 of the second movable mechanism 6200 moves in the second long hole 6276a, and the second movable mechanism 6200 rotates around the rotation shaft 6211 when viewed from the rear. Swings (rotates) clockwise. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 64, the second movable mechanism 6200 swings so that the tip side (hand side) moves upward. That is, the second movable mechanism 6200 rotates and moves from the lower center to the upper center (second moving path) of the game board 17, which is the moving path of the second movable mechanism 6200, so as to draw a circle from bottom to top. That is, the second movement path is the path of the second movable mechanism 6200 that moves as described above.

  Further, as described above, when the second movable mechanism 6200 swings, as shown in FIG. 64, the rotation pin 6212 of the second movable mechanism 6200 engages with the bent portion 6276b of the second long hole 6276a. Combine. Thus, the posture of the second movable mechanism 6200 that has been subjected to the second movement control is held.

  By performing the movement control as described above, after the first movement control is performed, the first movement mechanism is returned to the area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed, as shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. 72. The second movable mechanism 6200 can be moved via the second movement path. That is, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves back while rotating around the area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has dropped (falled). In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the second movable mechanism 6200 is moved so that the hand side faces upward. As a result, the space in the center role item 7000 can be effectively used.

  In addition, by performing the movement control as described above, the second movable mechanism 6200 enters the swing state, which is one mode of the effect state, as illustrated in FIGS. 68 and 72. In the swinging state, as shown in FIG. 72, the second movable mechanism 6200 is positioned so that the tip side faces diagonally upward and to the right, so that the area of the second movement path through which the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed ( The area below the second movable mechanism 6200 in the swinging state) is empty. Further, in this state, as shown in FIG. 72, except for the area where the second movable mechanism 6200 is located, of the first movement path, the area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed (the second area in the swing state). The area above the movable mechanism 6200) is also free. In the example shown in the figure, there is an area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed obliquely to the upper left side of the swingable second movable mechanism 6200 within the center role object 7000, and the second movable mechanism 6100 has an obliquely lower right side. An example is shown in which there is an area through which the mechanism 6200 has passed.

  Next, the third movement control by the third movement control means 6340 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the opening / closing motor 6341 is driven, the upper first arm 6354 is moved forward by the output gear 6351, the first transmission gear 6352, and the second transmission gear 6353 meshing with each other. It rotates clockwise. With the rotation of the upper first arm 6354, the shaft portion 6354c of the upper first arm 6354 moves in the long hole 6355b of the upper second arm 6355, and the upper second arm 6355 rotates around the rotation shaft 6355c. Then, it rotates counterclockwise in front view. As a result, the index finger 6310 fixed to the index finger-side extension 6355d of the upper second arm 6355 rotates so that the tip side (fingertip side) of the index finger 6310 moves upward. In other words, the game board 17 moves obliquely upward from the lower center in the area above the center (third movement path). That is, the third movement path is the path of the index finger 6310 (the third movable mechanism 6300) that moves as described above.

  By performing the movement control as described above, after the first movement control is executed, as shown in FIG. 73, the index finger 6310 is moved to the area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed on the first movement path. Can be moved. In the above-described movement control, the index finger 6310 is moved to a region other than the second movement route on the first movement route. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the fingertip side of the index finger portion 6310 is moved so as to face upward. Further, by performing the movement control as described above, both the second movement control and the third movement control are performed on the area (first movement path) used for the first movable mechanism 6100 to fall (fall). Will move. As a result, the space in the center role item 7000 can be effectively used.

  Further, with the rotation of the upper first arm 6354 described above, the lower first arm 6356 rotates counterclockwise in front view via the gear portion 6356a meshing with the gear portion 6354a of the upper first arm 6354. Rotate. With the rotation of the lower first arm 6356, the shaft portion 6356c of the lower first arm 6356 moves in the long hole 6357b of the lower second arm 6357, and the lower second arm 6357 rotates. It rotates clockwise as viewed from the front about the driving shaft 6357c. As a result, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 fixed to the ring finger / little finger side extension of the lower second arm 6357 move the tip side (fingertip side) of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 downward. To rotate. That is, the game board 17 is moved obliquely downward from the center area (third movement route) of the game board 17. That is, the third movement route is also a route of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 (the third movable mechanism 6300).

  After the second movement control is performed by performing the movement control as described above, as shown in FIG. 73, the ring finger 6320 and the third finger 6320 are located in the area where the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed on the second movement path. The little finger 6330 can be moved. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the fingertip sides of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are moved downward. As a result, the space in the center role item 7000 can be effectively used.

  In the present embodiment, the movement of the index finger 6310, the ring finger 6320, and the little finger 6330 is controlled by a single drive source (open / close motor 6341). Therefore, the index finger 6310, the ring finger 6320, and the little finger 6330 swing in conjunction with each other. Accordingly, in the third movement control, the movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 is controlled such that the index finger 6310, the ring finger 6320, and the little finger 6330 are simultaneously opened.

  By performing the movement control as described above, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 73, the third movable mechanism 6300 enters a rotating state which is one mode of the effect state. In the rotating state, the forefinger 6310 is located in a space diagonally upper left from the forefinger 6310 in the swinging state. In the rotating state, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are located diagonally lower right than the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 in the swinging state. As a result, as shown in FIG. 73, the movable body (the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300) is moved by a large operation while effectively utilizing the space in the center accessory 7000. It can be controlled (open / closed), and can give a visual impression (impact) to the player.

  In addition, when the first movable auditors unit 6000 in the effect state is set to the initial state, the movement control opposite to the above-described movement control is executed.

  If the opening / closing motor 6341 of the third movement control means 6340 is rotated in a direction opposite to the above-described movement control, the drive of the opening / closing motor 6341 is transmitted by the opening / closing mechanism 6350 so that the fingertip side of the index finger 6310 is moved downward. Swing so that it moves to the side (obliquely lower right side). In addition, the fingertip sides of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 swing so as to move upward (to the upper left side diagonally). Accordingly, the index finger 6310, the ring finger 6320, and the little finger 6330 rotate with respect to each other so as to close.

  Further, if the rotation motor 6261 of the second movement control means 6260 is rotated in the direction opposite to the above-described movement control, the drive of the rotation motor 6261 is transmitted by the rotation mechanism 6270 so that the second movement is controlled. The movable mechanism 6200 swings so that the hand side moves downward (obliquely right below).

  In addition, if the lifting / lowering motor 6130 of the first movement control means 6120 is rotated in the direction opposite to the above-described movement control, the drive of the lifting / lowering motor 6130 is transmitted by the lifting / lowering mechanism 6140, so that the first movable mechanism 6100 Is moved upward (upward) (first movement control). In the present embodiment, since the first movable mechanism 6100 is urged upward by the constant load spring 6152 of the elevation assisting member 6150, when the first movable mechanism 6100 is elevated by the first movement control means 6120, it moves upward. Is assisted. In the present embodiment, when the first movable accessory unit 6000 is in the initial state, the control is performed such that the lock portion 6161 of the lock member 6160 projects. Accordingly, the upper surface of the lock portion 6161 faces the lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 of the first movable mechanism 6100, and the drop of the first movable mechanism 6100 is restricted.

  As described above, according to the first movement control (linear movement), the second movement control (oscillation), and the third movement control (rotation), each of which has a different movement mode, the first movable mechanism 6100 The movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be varied, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, light emission control for causing the wrist 6220, the back part 6230, the middle finger 6240, the thumb 6250, the index finger 6310, the ring finger 6320, and the little finger 6330 to emit light may be executed. Hereinafter, the light emission mode will be described by taking the middle finger portion 6240 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 66, when the light emission control is executed, the light emitting means 6242a mounted on the substrate 6242 emits light. The light emitted from the light emitting means 6242a enters a light guide member 6243 arranged on the front side of the substrate 6242. In the example shown in the figure, the light emitted by the light emitting means 6242a is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  Part of the light that enters (enters) the light guide member 6243 and enters the light guide member 6243 is the light that passes through the light guide member 6243 and the surface of the light guide member 6243 (the lens member 6244 side). Surface) and light reflected on the surface. Another part of the light entering the light guide member 6243 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 6243.

  Specifically, of the light that enters the light guide member 6243, the angle of incidence of the light guide member 6243 with respect to the surface (the angle formed between the incident light and a line perpendicular to the surface in a cross-sectional view) ) Are smaller than the predetermined angle, the light is transmitted through the light guide member 6243 and emitted to the anti-reflection member 6241 side, and is reflected to the surface of the light guide member 6243 and emitted to the reflection member 6241. Divided into light and Further, of the light that enters the light guide member 6243, the light whose incident angle is larger than a predetermined angle is guided in the surface direction of the light guide member 6243 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 6243.

  A part of the light that enters (enters) the lens member 6244 via the light guide member 6243 and enters the lens member 6244 is partially transmitted to the lens member 6244 and the surface of the lens member 6244 (counterclockwise). And the light reflected on the light member 6243 side). Another part of the light entering the lens member 6244 is totally reflected inside the lens member 6244.

  Specifically, of the light that enters the lens member 6244, the angle of incidence on the surface of the lens member 6244 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line perpendicular to the surface in cross-sectional view) is The light smaller than the predetermined angle is transmitted through the lens member 6244 and emitted to the light guide member 6243 side, and is reflected on the surface of the lens member 6244 and reflected on the light guide member 6243 side (reflection member 6241). Side) and the light that is emitted. Further, of the light that enters the lens member 6244, the light whose incident angle is larger than the predetermined angle is guided in the surface direction of the lens member 6244 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 6244.

  Further, as described above, the light reflected by the lens member 6244 and the light guide member 6243 and emitted to the reflection member 6241 side is reflected by the reflection member 6241 and enters the lens member 6244 (light guide member 6243) again. Light.

  With the above structure, light reflected by the reflection member 6241 is also incident on the lens member 6244 located on the back surface side of the mounting surface of the substrate 6242, where light from the light emitting unit 6242a is difficult to reach. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in irradiation through the lens member 6244.

  In the present embodiment, when viewed in the vertical direction, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 with respect to the horizontal plane is smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflecting member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 with respect to the horizontal plane. I'm making it big. As a result, the inclined portion 6241a of the reflection member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 have the leading end side in the extending direction close to the leading end side in the extending direction of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244. Accordingly, light is transmitted through the light guide member 6243 and the reflection member 6241 from a position close to the distal end portion of the lens member 6244 in the extending direction, where light is difficult to reach. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the applied irradiation.

[Second movable character unit]
Hereinafter, the second movable accessory unit 8000 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 87.

  The second movable auditors unit 8000 emits light at an appropriate timing to give a visual impression (impact) to the player. The second movable role unit 8000 is installed on the game board 17. The second movable auditors unit 8000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the emission of the accessory (movable light emitter 8200 described later) at a position on the game board 17 where the player can visually recognize the player. . Further, in the present embodiment, the movable object whose light emission is controlled is a movable light emitter that gives a visual impression to a player by moving the accessory at an appropriate timing. Movement control of the movable light emitting body 8200 is executed at a position on the game board 17 where the player can visually recognize the movable light emitting body 8200. The second movable accessory unit 8000 mainly includes a lifting control unit 8100 and a movable light emitting body 8200.

  The movable light-emitting body 8200 is controlled to move by an elevation control means 8100 described later. The movable light-emitting body 8200 is a role imitating a sword. The detailed description of the movable light emitting body 8200 will be described later.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, as shown in FIG. 85, the state in which the movement of the movable light emitting body 8200 is not controlled is set as the initial state. In addition, from FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, as shown in FIG. 86, a state in which the movement of the movable light emitting body 8200 is controlled is defined as an effect state. In FIGS. 76 to 78, 80, and 81, a cover member 8120 described later is omitted.

  The elevation control means 8100 shown in FIGS. 74 to 82 controls the movement of the movable light-emitting body 8200 on the game board 17 so as to move up and down in the vertical direction. The elevation control means 8100 mainly includes an elevation base member 8110, a cover member 8120, a rotation guide section 8121, an elevation motor 8130, and an elevation mechanism 8140. Hereinafter, the configuration of the elevation control unit 8100 will be described with reference to the initial state.

  The lifting base member 8110 shown in FIG. 82 holds a lifting motor 8130 and a lifting mechanism 8140 described below. The movable light emitter 8200 is controlled to move up and down along the elevating base member 8110. The elevating base member 8110 is fixed to the game board 17. The elevating base member 8110 is formed in a long shape along the vertical direction. The elevating base member 8110 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. An elevating mechanism 8140 described below is disposed behind the elevating base member 8110. The elevating base member 8110 mainly includes a first guide groove 8111, a second guide groove 8112, and a third guide groove 8113.

  The first guide groove 8111 shown in FIG. 82 guides the movable light-emitting body 8200 in the vertical direction. The first guide groove 8111 is formed penetrating the elevating base member 8110 back and forth. The first guide groove 8111 is formed above the elevating base member 8110. Further, the first guide groove 8111 is formed in a vertically long hole shape.

  The second guide groove 8112 guides the movable luminous body 8200 in the vertical direction. The second guide groove 8112 is formed penetrating the elevating base member 8110 back and forth. The second guide groove 8112 is formed below the elevating base member 8110. Further, the second guide groove 8112 is formed in a vertically long hole shape. In the present embodiment, a pair of the second guide grooves 8112 is formed at an interval on the left and right.

  The third guide groove 8113 is for guiding the movable light-emitting body 8200 in the vertical direction. The third guide groove 8113 is formed to penetrate the elevating base member 8110 back and forth. The third guide groove 8113 is formed below the second guide groove 8112 in the elevating base member 8110. In addition, the third guide groove 8113 is formed in a vertically long hole shape.

  The cover member 8120 shown in FIG. 74 holds an elevating mechanism 8140 to be described later together with the elevating base member 8110. The cover member 8120 is disposed behind the lifting base member 8110. The cover member 8120 has a substantially box shape that opens forward. The cover member 8120 and the elevating base member 8110 constitute a housing that houses the elevating mechanism 8140.

  A rotation guide portion 8121 shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 guides a rotation guide pin 8273a provided on a lever portion 8270 described later. The rotation guide portion 8121 is provided on a surface facing the rear side of the cover member 8120 (not shown). As shown in FIG. 78, the rotation guide portion 8121 has a substantially box shape that opens forward and to the left. Further, the rotation guide portion 8121 mainly includes a rotation guide groove 8121a.

  The rotation guide groove 8121a shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 is to receive a rotation guide pin 8273a described later. The rotation guide groove 8121a is formed penetrating the rotation guide portion 8121 back and forth. The rotation guide groove 8121a is shaped like a vertically elongated hole. Further, the rotation guide groove 8121a is formed as a bent portion 8121b whose lower end portion is bent so as to extend diagonally rightward and downward.

  The elevating motor 8130 shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 is a drive source for moving the movable light emitting body 8200. The elevating motor 8130 is fixed to a surface of the upper end of the elevating base member 8110 facing the front side. The output shaft 8131 of the elevating motor 8130 is provided so as to penetrate the elevating base member 8110 back and forth and protrude rearward (see FIG. 77).

  The lifting mechanism 8140 shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 transmits the driving force generated by the lifting motor 8130 to the movable light emitting body 8200. The lifting mechanism 8140 mainly includes an output gear 8141, a first transmission gear 8142, an intermediate transmission gear 8143, a second transmission gear 8144, an urging spring 8150, and a lock member 8160.

  The output gear 8141 shown in FIG. 77 extracts the driving force of the lifting motor 8130. The output gear 8141 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 8131 of the lifting motor 8130.

  The first transmission gear 8142 is meshed with the output gear 8141. The first transmission gear 8142 is disposed substantially to the right of the output gear 8141. The first transmission gear 8142 rotates around the axis of the first transmission gear 8142. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 8142 is rotatably supported by a surface facing the front side of the cover member 8120 (not shown).

  The intermediate transmission gear 8143 is arranged between the first transmission gear 8142 and a second transmission gear 8144 described later. The intermediate transmission gear 8143 transmits the drive of the first transmission gear 8142 to a second transmission gear 8144 described later. The intermediate transmission gear 8143 rotates around the axis of the intermediate transmission gear 8143. In the present embodiment, the intermediate transmission gear 8143 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the front side of the cover member 8120 (not shown). In the present embodiment, a plurality of intermediate transmission gears 8143 (six in the illustrated example) are arranged. In FIG. 77, some of the plurality of intermediate transmission gears 8143 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

  The second transmission gear 8144 is meshed with the intermediate transmission gear 8143. The second transmission gear 8144 is arranged substantially lower right of the first transmission gear 8142. The second transmission gear 8144 meshes with a later-described rack portion 8222 provided on the movable light-emitting body 8200. The second transmission gear 8144 rotates around the axis of the second transmission gear 8144. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 8144 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the front side of the cover member 8120 (not shown).

  The biasing spring 8150 shown in FIG. 76 biases the movable light emitting body 8200 upward. In the present embodiment, the biasing spring 8150 is a coil-shaped tension spring. One end of the biasing spring 8150 is connected to the upper side of the third guide groove 8113 of the elevating base member 8110. The other end of the biasing spring 8150 is connected to a third guide pin 8242 described later provided on the movable light-emitting body 8200.

  The lock member 8160 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 holds the movable light emitting body 8200 in an initial state. The lock member 8160 is provided with a lock portion 8161 that protrudes rightward in a protruding state and is immersed. The lock member 8160 is provided on a surface facing the rear side of the elevating base member 8110. Further, the lock member 8160 is disposed at the upper left end of the elevating base member 8110 such that the lock portion 8161 faces right.

  The lock member 8160 has an electric wire wound in a coil shape and has a solenoid (not shown) that generates a magnetic field by receiving electric power. The solenoid has a plunger (not shown) urged to project rightward by a spring member (not shown), and the plunger is connected to the lock portion 8161. The lock portion 8161 is immersed when the solenoid draws the plunger to the left along with the generation of a magnetic field due to energization. Further, the lock portion 8161 projects rightward due to the urging force of the spring member when the power is released.

  The movable light-emitting body 8200 shown in FIGS. 74 to 81 is controlled by the elevation control means 8100 to move up and down on the game board 17 in the vertical direction. The movable light emitting body 8200 mainly includes a base member 8210, a handle 8250, a flange 8260, a lever 8270, and a blade 8280.

  A base member 8210 shown in FIG. 82 is provided with a handle 8250, a flange 8260, a lever 8270, and a blade 8280 described later. The base member 8210 is connected to the elevating base member 8110 so as to be vertically movable. The base member 8210 is arranged in front of the elevating base member 8110 as shown in FIG. The base member 8210 is formed in a long shape along the vertical direction. The base member 8210 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 8210 mainly includes a handle-side base portion 8220, a flange-side base portion 8230, and a blade-side base portion 8240.

  The handle-side base portion 8220 constitutes an upper side portion of the base member 8210. The handle portion base 8220 is provided with a handle portion 8250 described later. The pattern-side base portion 8220 has a shape corresponding to a pattern portion 8250 described later. In the present embodiment, the handle portion-side base portion 8220 has a vertically long shape. The handle-side base portion 8220 mainly includes a first guide pin 8221 and a rack portion 8222.

  The first guide pin 8221 shown in FIG. 82 is guided along the first guide groove 8111 of the elevating base member 8110. The first guide pin 8221 is inserted into the first guide groove 8111 (not shown). The first guide pin 8221 has a substantially columnar shape. The first guide pin 8221 is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The first guide pin 8221 has a front end connected to a surface of the handle-side base 8220 facing rearward. In the present embodiment, a pair of first guide pins 8221 is provided vertically.

  The rack portion 8222 shown in FIGS. 77, 78, and 81 meshes with the second transmission gear 8144 on the rear side of the elevating base member 8110. The rack portion 8222 has a substantially rectangular block shape when viewed from the front. The rack 8222 is connected to the rear end of the first guide pin 8221. That is, the rack portion 8222 is connected to the handle portion base portion 8220 via the first guide pin 8221. In the present embodiment, a pair of first guide pins 8221 is connected to the rack 8222 vertically. The rack portion 8222 mainly includes a tooth portion 8222a and a lock receiving portion 8222b.

  The tooth portion 8222a is a portion that meshes with the second transmission gear 8144. The tooth portion 8222a is arranged on the right side of the second transmission gear 8144. The tooth portion 8222a is formed over and under the rack portion 8222.

  The lock receiving portion 8222b shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 receives the lock portion 8161 of the lock member 8160. The lock receiving portion 8222b is formed on the left side of the rack portion 8222 at a position facing the lock portion 8161. The lock receiving portion 8222b is formed in a concave shape that opens in the front-rear direction and the left direction. As shown in FIG. 77, when the lock receiving portion 8222b receives the lock portion 8161, the movable light emitting body 8200 is prevented from falling.

  A flange-side base portion 8230 shown in FIG. 82 constitutes a vertical intermediate portion of the base member 8210. The flange 8260 described later is installed in the flange-side base 8230. The flange-side base portion 8230 has a shape corresponding to a flange portion 8260 described later. In the present embodiment, the flange-side base portion 8230 has a shape wider in the left-right direction than the handle-side base portion 8220. The flange-side base portion 8230 mainly includes a shaft hole 8231 and a boss portion 8232.

  The pivot hole 8231 of the lever portion 8270 described later is inserted into the shaft hole 8231. The shaft hole 8231 is formed to penetrate the left side portion of the flange side base portion 8230 forward and backward.

  The boss 8232 shown in FIG. 78 is formed so as to protrude from the surface facing the rear side of the left side portion of the flange-side base 8230. The boss 8232 has a cylindrical shape. In the present embodiment, the shaft hole 8231 is formed so as to penetrate the boss portion 8232 in the front-back direction.

  The blade part side base portion 8240 constitutes a lower portion of the base member 8210. The blade portion 8280 described below is installed in the blade portion side base portion 8240. The blade portion side base portion 8240 has a shape corresponding to a blade portion 8280 described later. In the present embodiment, the blade portion side base portion 8240 is wider in the left-right direction than the flange portion side base portion 8230, and has a vertically long shape.

  In the present embodiment, the blade-side base portion 8240 constitutes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from a light emitting unit 8281a described later. The detailed description of the blade portion side base portion 8240 as a reflection member will be described later. The blade-side base portion 8240 mainly includes a second guide pin 8241 and a third guide pin 8242.

  The second guide pins 8241 shown in FIGS. 76, 78, and 82 are inserted into the second guide grooves 8112 of the elevating base member 8110, and are guided along the second guide grooves 8112. The second guide pin 8241 has a substantially columnar shape. The second guide pin 8241 is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The front end of the second guide pin 8241 is connected to a surface of the blade base side base 8240 facing rearward. In the present embodiment, a pair of second guide pins 8241 are formed at right and left intervals to correspond to the pair of second guide grooves 8112. In the present embodiment, the second guide pin 8241 has a substantially cylindrical bush having a flange portion whose outer diameter is larger than the groove width of the second guide groove 8112 so as to prevent the second guide pin 8241 from coming off. , Are fixed to the rear end (see FIG. 78).

  The third guide pin 8242 shown in FIGS. 76 and 82 is inserted into the third guide groove 8113 of the elevating base member 8110, and is guided along the third guide groove 8113. The third guide pin 8242 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The third guide pin 8242 is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The third guide pin 8242 has a front end connected to a surface of the blade portion side base portion 8240 facing rearward. In the present embodiment, the third guide pin 8242 is connected to the other end of the biasing spring 8150 (see FIG. 76).

  The handle 8250 shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 is fixed so as to cover the handle-side base 8220. The handle 8250 has a shape imitating a handle of a sword.

  The flange 8260 is fixed so as to cover the flange-side base 8230. The flange 8260 has a shape imitating a flange of a sword.

  The lever portion 8270 shown in FIGS. 74 to 81 is connected to the flange-side base portion 8230 and rotates with respect to the flange-side base portion 8230. The lever portion 8270 mainly includes a lever main body 8271, a rotating shaft 8272, and an arm 8273.

  The lever main body 8271 is a member that extends diagonally to the upper left from the flange-side base portion 8230 side. The lever main body 8271 is disposed on the front side of the flange-side base portion 8230. The lever portion 8270 has a shape imitating a lever installed on a steering wheel, such as a clutch lever or a brake lever of a motorcycle.

  A rotation shaft 8272 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 is a shaft connected to the lever main body 8271. The front end of the rotating shaft 8272 is connected to the base end side of the lever main body 8271 (toward the flange-side base portion 8230). The rotating shaft 8272 has a substantially columnar shape. The rotating shaft 8272 is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The rotating shaft 8272 is inserted through a shaft hole 8231 (see FIG. 82) formed in the boss 8232 of the flange-side base 8230. By inserting the rotating shaft 8272 into the shaft hole 8231, the lever portion 8270 is pivotally supported on the flange-side base portion 8230.

  The arm 8273 shown in FIG. 77 is a member extending obliquely upward and to the right from the flange-side base portion 8230 side. As shown in FIG. 78, the arm 8273 has a base end (the flange-side base 8230 side) connected to a rear end of the rotating shaft 8272. In the present embodiment, the arm 8273 is disposed on the distal end side of the boss 8232 of the flange-side base 8230 in the protruding direction. As shown in FIG. 78, the arm 8273 is disposed such that the distal end in the extending direction is received in the rotation guide 8121 from an opening facing the left side of the rotation guide 8121. The arm 8273 mainly includes a rotation guide pin 8273a.

  The rotation guide pin 8273a is inserted into the rotation guide groove 8121a side of the lifting base member 8110. The rotation guide pin 8273a is substantially cylindrical. The rotation guide pin 8273a is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-back direction. The rotation guide pin 8273a has a front end connected to a tip of the arm 8273 in the extending direction. In the present embodiment, the rotation guide pin 8273a has a substantially cylindrical bush having a flange portion having an outer diameter larger than the width of the rotation guide groove 8121a so as to prevent the rotation guide pin 8273a from coming off. , Are fixed to the rear end (see FIG. 78).

  The blade portion 8280 shown in FIGS. 74, 75, 83, 84, and 87 is fixed so as to cover the blade portion-side base portion 8240. The blade portion 8280 has a light emitting unit 8281a described later mounted thereon, and functions as a light emitting unit that emits light when light emission control is performed. The blade portion 8280 has a shape imitating the blade of a sword. The blade portion 8280 mainly includes a substrate 8281, a light guide member 8282, a lens member 8283, and a cover member 8284. Note that FIG. 87 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 84, and schematically shows the blade section 8280.

  A substrate 8281 shown in FIGS. 82 to 84 has electronic components (functional components) mounted thereon. The substrate 8281 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-back direction. The front surface of the substrate 8281 is a mounting surface on which a light emitting unit 8281a described later is mounted. The substrate 8281 is mounted on the front side of the blade-side base 8240.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the substrate 8281 has substantially the same shape as the blade-side base portion 8240 when viewed from the front, and has a smaller area than the blade-side base portion 8240. Is formed.

  The light-emitting means 8281a shown in FIG. 87 irradiates light as a light source. The light emitting means 8281a is mounted on a mounting surface which is a surface facing the front of the substrate 8281. A plurality of light emitting means 8281a are arranged at intervals on the mounting surface of the substrate 8281. The light emitting unit 8281a can employ various configurations. For example, the light emitting unit 8281a may be an LED.

  The light guide member 8282 guides light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a. The light guide member 8282 is formed of a transmissive member. The light guide member 8282 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-back direction. The light guide member 8282 is arranged so as to cover the mounting surface side of the substrate 8281, guides the light introduced from the light emitting unit 8281 a in the plate surface direction inside the light guide member 8282, and out of the light guide member 8282. Derive.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 8282 has a shape substantially corresponding to the substrate 8281 in a front view. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, in the present embodiment, the left end of the light guide member 8282 has an inclined surface shape that faces diagonally forward and left. Further, a left end portion of the light guide member 8282 has an inclined surface shape along the back surface of a lens member 8283 described later.

  The lens member 8283 covers the blade-side base 8240, the substrate 8281 and a part of the light guide member 8282. The lens member 8283 is formed of a transmissive member. The lens member 8283 diffuses the light guided from the light guide member 8282. In this embodiment, the lens member 8283 is disposed so as to cover the blade end side base 8240, the substrate 8281, and the left end of the light guide member 8282.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the lens member 8283 is located outside (left side) of the substrate 8281 on the outer side (left end) of the substrate 8281 from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 8281a. It has been extended. The lens member 8283 extends to the rear side of the surface facing the rear of the substrate 8281 (a position beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 8281a on the substrate 8281). In the present embodiment, the lens member 8283 is formed in a substantially plate shape whose surface (the surface on the side opposite to the light guide member 8282) is arranged so as to face diagonally forward and left. In this embodiment, the lens member 8283 is arranged such that the left end of the lens member 8283 is located outside the left end of the substrate 8281.

  In the present embodiment, the blade-side base 8240 (base member 8210) is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light. The blade-side base portion 8240 reflects light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a, the light guide member 8282, and the lens member 8283.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the present embodiment, the blade-side base portion 8240 extends so as to be located outside (to the left of) the outer end (left end) of the substrate 8281. Further, the blade portion side base portion 8240 is on the rear side of the surface facing the rear side of the substrate 8281 (at a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281) and reflects light emitted from the lens member 8283. It is provided in a possible position. In the present embodiment, the surface facing the front side of the left side portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240 is formed on the left side of the lens member 8283 so that light emitted from the end portion (left end portion) of the lens member 8283 can be reflected. It is provided at a position facing a surface facing the rear side of the one side part. Further, in the present embodiment, the left end portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240 is an inclined surface facing diagonally left and forward. Further, the left end portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240 has an inclined surface shape along the back surface of the lens member 8283.

  A cover member 8284 shown in FIGS. 74, 75, 76, and 77, together with the lens member 8283, covers a part of the blade side base portion 8240, the substrate 8281, and a part of the light guide member 8282. In the present embodiment, the cover member 8284 is arranged so as to cover the blade part side base 8240, the substrate 8281 and the light guide member 8282 except for the part where the lens member 8283 is arranged. The cover member 8284 is formed of an impermeable member. In the present embodiment, the lower end of the cover member 8284 is shaped like a flame. In addition, the cover member 8284 mainly includes a light-transmitting portion 8284a.

  The light transmitting portion 8284a is formed by a transmissive member. The light transmitting portion 8284a is arranged at the center in the left-right direction of the cover member 8284. The light transmitting portion 8284a may be made of the same material as the lens member 8283.

  Further, in addition to the above-described blade 8280, the handle 8250 and the flange 8260 may function as a light emitting unit. In this case, the handle portion 8250 and the flange portion 8260 may be provided with a substrate, a light emitting unit, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member, similarly to the blade portion side base portion 8240.

  Hereinafter, the movement control of the second movable auditors unit 8000 configured as described above will be described. In the following, a description will be given of a movement control in which the movable light emitting body 8200 in the initial state is set to the effect state.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the second movable accessory unit 8000 is located on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in a front view. In the initial state shown in FIG. 75, the movable light emitting body 8200 is located above the elevating base member 8110. Further, as shown in FIG. 85, in the initial state, the movable luminous body 8200 has the upper portions of the handle portion 8250 and the lever portion 8270 hidden behind the upper part (decorative member 56) of the center role object 7000, and It is configured to be difficult to see from.

  As shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 81, when the elevation motor 8130 of the elevation control means 8100 is driven, the second transmission gear 8141, the first transmission gear 8142, and the intermediate transmission gear 8143 mesh with each other. 8144 rotates around the axis counterclockwise in rear view.

  The rotation of the second transmission gear 8144 is transmitted to the rack 8222 meshing with the second transmission gear 8144. The rack portion 8222 is sent downward as the second transmission gear 8144 rotates. The movable light-emitting body 8200 to which the rack 8222 is connected moves (falls) downward while being guided along the first guide groove 8111, the second guide groove 8112, and the third guide groove 8113 of the elevating base member 8110. .

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the movement control, the restriction on the downward movement of the movable light emitting body 8200 by the lock member 8160 is released. The lock member 8160 is controlled so that the lock portion 8161 is immersed in the movement control. Accordingly, the restriction of the lock portion 8161 on the lock receiving portion 8222b provided on the movable light emitting body 8200 is released, and the movable light emitting body 8200 can move downward. In the present embodiment, during the movement control, the movable light-emitting body 8200 moves downward against the upward urging force of the urging spring 8150.

  In addition, as the movable luminous body 8200 moves downward with respect to the elevation base member 8110, the rotation guide pin 8273a provided on the lever portion 8270 moves downward along the rotation guide groove 8121a of the elevation base member 8110. Move to the side. As the movable luminous body 8200 moves downward, the rotation guide pin 8273a is guided by the bent portion 8121b of the rotation guide groove 8121a. Thus, the lever portion 8270 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 8272 in rear view. As a result, the lever main body 8271 of the lever portion 8270 moves such that the distal end side approaches the handle 8250 side.

  By performing the movement control as described above, the movable light-emitting body 8200 enters the effect state. As shown in FIG. 79, in the effect state, the movable light-emitting body 8200 is located below the elevating base member 8110. As shown in FIG. 86, in the effect state, the entire lever portion 8270 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  In addition, when the movable light-emitting body 8200 in the effect state is set to the initial state, movement control opposite to the above-described movement control is executed. If the elevating motor 8130 is rotated in a direction opposite to the above-described movement control, the drive of the elevating motor 8130 is transmitted by the elevating mechanism 8140, so that the movable light emitting body 8200 moves (ups) upward. In the present embodiment, since the movable luminous body 8200 is urged upward by the urging spring 8150, the upward movement is assisted when ascending. Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable light emitting body 8200 is in the initial state, the control is performed such that the lock portion 8161 of the lock member 8160 projects. As a result, the lock receiving portion 8222b of the movable light-emitting body 8200 receives the lock portion 8161, whereby the drop of the movable light-emitting body 8200 is restricted.

  As described above, the effect that the player can visually recognize by the movable light-emitting body 8200 can improve the playability.

  Hereinafter, the light emission control of the second movable accessory unit 8000 configured as described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the light emission control is executed, the light emitting means 8281a mounted on the substrate 8281 emits light. The light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a enters a light guide member 8282 arranged on the front side of the substrate 8281. In the example of the figure, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8281a is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  Part of the light that enters (enters) the light guide member 8282 and enters the light guide member 8282 is the light that passes through the light guide member 8282 and the surface of the light guide member 8282 (the lens member 8283 side). Surface) and light reflected on the surface. Another part of the light entering the light guide member 8282 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 8282.

  Specifically, of the light that enters the light guide member 8282, the angle of incidence of the light guide member 8282 with respect to the surface (the angle formed by the light that enters in a cross-sectional view and a line that is orthogonal to the surface). ) Is smaller than the predetermined angle, the light transmitted through the light guide member 8282 and emitted to the blade body side base portion 8240 side and the light reflected on the surface of the light guide member 8282 and the blade portion side And light emitted to the base portion 8240 side. Further, of the light that enters the light guide member 8282, the light whose incident angle is larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the surface of the light guide member 8282 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 8282.

  Part of the light that enters (enters) the lens member 8283 via the light guide member 8282 and enters the lens member 8283 is part of the light that passes through the lens member 8283 and the surface of the lens member 8283 (counterclockwise). Light reflected on the optical member 8282 side). Another part of the light that enters the lens member 8283 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8283.

  Specifically, of the light that enters the lens member 8283, the angle of incidence on the surface of the lens member 8283 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line perpendicular to the surface in a cross-sectional view) is formed. Those smaller than the predetermined angle are transmitted through the lens member 8283 and emitted to the counter light guiding member 8282 side, and reflected on the surface of the lens member 8283 and reflected on the light guiding member 8282 side (the blade side). And light emitted to the base portion 8240). Further, of the light that enters the lens member 8283, the light having an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided in the surface direction of the lens member 8283 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 8283.

  In addition, as described above, the light reflected by the lens member 8283 and the light guide member 8282 and emitted to the blade portion side base portion 8240 (reflecting member) side is reflected by the blade portion side base portion 8240, and again the lens Light enters the member 8283 (light guide member 8282).

  With the above configuration, the blade-side base portion 8240 formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light is provided at a position capable of reflecting light emitted from the end of the lens member 8283. The light reflected by the blade portion side base portion 8240 can also enter the lens member 8283 located on the back surface side with respect to the mounting surface of the substrate 8281 where the light from the light emitting means 8281a is difficult to reach. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of non-uniformity in the irradiation via.

  In the present embodiment, the lens member 8283 is disposed so that the surface faces obliquely forward. Thus, light from the lens member 8283 can be emitted toward the front side facing the player.

  The above-described light emission control can employ various light emission modes. For example, the light emitting unit 8281a may be appropriately turned on or blinked to emit light in a predetermined pattern.

  Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 88, the outer end (left end) of the blade portion side base portion 8240 (base member 8210) is larger than the outer end (left end) of the lens member 8283. You may form so that it may be located outside (left side). The surface of the left end portion of the lens member 8283 facing the rear side is opposed to the surface of the blade portion side base portion 8240 facing the front side with a gap.

  Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the light emitted by the light emitting unit 8281a enters the lens member 8283 via the light guide member 8282. In the example of the figure, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8281a is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Part of the light that enters the lens member 8283 is split into light that passes through the lens member 8283 and is reflected on the surface of the lens member 8283 (the surface on the side of the light-guiding member 8282). Another part of the light that enters the lens member 8283 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8283.

  In the present embodiment, light guided in the surface direction of the lens member 8283 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 8283 is transmitted from the front end surface of the lens member 8283 (the surface facing the rear side at the left end). Light is emitted backward.

  The light emitted backward from the distal end surface of the lens member 8283 is reflected toward the lens member 8283 by the surface of the blade portion side base portion 8240 facing the front at the left end, and enters the lens member 8283 again. .

  Even in the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in irradiation through the lens member 8283. Further, in the present embodiment, light emitted backward from the distal end surface of the lens member 8283 can be reflected by the front-facing surface at the left end of the blade-side base portion 8240. Accordingly, light emitted backward from the distal end surface of the lens member 8283 can be reflected toward the front side facing the player, and the light can be emitted through the lens member 8283.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the movable light-emitting body 8200 is controlled to be movable up and down, but is not limited to such an aspect. Various directions can be adopted for the movable control of the movable light-emitting body 8200.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable light emitting body 8200 has a shape imitating a sword. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and various shapes can be adopted.

  For example, as in the third embodiment shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the movable light-emitting body 8900 may constitute a role imitating an arm with a hand and a wrist. Movement control of the movable light emitting body 8900 is executed by the movement control means, and light emission control is executed by the light emission control means. In this embodiment, the movable light-emitting body 8900 includes a finger 8910. The movable light-emitting body 8900 is provided with five fingers each having a common configuration. Hereinafter, one finger portion 8910 will be described as an example.

  The finger portion 8910 mainly includes a base member 8920, a substrate 8930, a light guide member 8940, a lens member 8950, and a cover member 8960.

  A substrate 8930 shown in FIGS. 90 and 91 has a light emitting unit 8931 mounted thereon in substantially the same manner as the substrate 8281 described above. The substrate 8930 is provided on a base member 8920 described later. The light emitting unit 8931 irradiates light as a light source, similarly to the light emitting unit 8281a described above.

  The base member 8920 is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, in substantially the same manner as the above-described blade-side base portion 8240. The base member 8920 is provided so as to be located outside (an end opposite to the substrate 8930) from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 8931 on the substrate 8930 and an outer end (fingertip end) of the substrate 8930. . Further, the base member 8920 is provided at a position on the front side of the substrate 8930 in a direction in which the back surface faces the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 8931 (a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the base member 8920 is formed as an inclined portion 8921 in which the end of the fingertip side is inclined toward the side where the back surface of the mounting surface is directed toward the front side.

  The light guide member 8940 guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 8931, similarly to the light guide member 8282 described above. The light guide member 8940 is provided so as to be located outside (an end opposite to the substrate 8930) from an outer end (a fingertip side end) of the substrate 8930 from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 8931 on the substrate 8930. I have. In addition, the light guide member 8940 is provided at a position on the front side in a direction in which the back surface faces the back surface of the light emitting unit 8931 on the substrate 8930 (a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the light guide member 8940 is formed as an inclined portion 8941 in which the end portion of the fingertip side is inclined toward the side where the back surface of the mounting surface is directed toward the front side.

  The lens member 8950 is provided so as to be located outside (an end opposite to the substrate 8930) from an end (fingertip end) of the substrate 8930 from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 8931 on the substrate 8930. Further, the lens member 8950 extends so as to be inclined to a position on the front side in the direction in which the back surface faces the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 8931 on the substrate 8930 (a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the lens member 8950 is formed as an inclined portion 8951 in which a fingertip side end portion (a portion surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 91) is inclined toward the front side with the back surface of the mounting surface facing toward the front side. ing.

  The inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 extends so as to be inclined differently from the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940. In the present embodiment, in cross section, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 with respect to the horizontal plane. Accordingly, the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 are arranged such that the distal end in the extending direction is close to the distal end in the extending direction of the lens member 8950.

  The cover member 8960 is disposed so as to cover the light guide member 8940 together with the lens member 8950, similarly to the cover member 8284 described above. The cover member 8960 is formed of an impermeable member.

  Hereinafter, the light emission control of the second movable accessory unit 8000 (movable light emitter 8900) configured as described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the light emission control is executed, the light emitting means 8931 mounted on the substrate 8930 emits light. The light emitted from the light emitting means 8931 enters a light guide member 8940 arranged on the front side of the substrate 8930. In the illustrated example, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8931 is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  Part of the light that enters (enters) the light guide member 8940 and enters the light guide member 8940 is partially transmitted through the light guide member 8940 and the surface of the light guide member 8940 (the lens member 8950 side). Surface) and light reflected on the surface. Another part of the light that enters the light guide member 8940 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 8940.

  Specifically, of the light that enters the light guide member 8940, the angle of incidence of the light guide member 8940 with respect to the surface (the angle formed between the incident light and a line orthogonal to the surface in a cross-sectional view) ) Are smaller than a predetermined angle, the light transmitted through the light guide member 8940 and emitted to the side opposite to the base member 8920 and the light reflected to the surface of the light guide member 8940 and emitted to the base member 8920 side. And split into light. Further, of the light that enters the light guide member 8940, the light whose incident angle is larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the surface of the light guide member 8940 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 8940.

  Part of the light that enters (incidents) the lens member 8950 via the light guide member 8940 and enters the lens member 8950 is partially transmitted to the lens member 8950 and the surface of the lens member 8950 (reverse light). Light reflected on the optical member 8940 side). Another part of the light that enters the lens member 8950 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8950.

  Specifically, of the light entering the lens member 8950, the angle of incidence on the surface of the lens member 8950 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line perpendicular to the surface in cross-sectional view) is Those smaller than the predetermined angle are transmitted through the lens member 8950 and emitted to the counter light guide member 8940 side, and reflected on the surface of the lens member 8950 and reflected on the light guide member 8940 side (base member 8920). Side) and the light that is emitted. Further, of the light that enters the lens member 8950, the light having an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided in the surface direction of the lens member 8950 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 8950.

  Further, as described above, light reflected by the lens member 8950 and the light guide member 8940 and emitted to the base member 8920 side is reflected by the base member 8920, and enters the lens member 8950 (light guide member 8940) again. Light.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 with respect to the horizontal plane is set larger than the inclined angle of the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 with respect to the horizontal plane. I have. As a result, the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 have the distal end in the extending direction approaching the distal end in the extending direction of the inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950. Accordingly, light is transmitted through the light guide member 8940 and the base member 8920 from a position where light does not easily reach and is located close to the distal end portion of the lens member 8950 in the extending direction. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the applied irradiation.

  The outline of the present invention is listed below based on the above embodiments.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine provided with an effect device for operating an accessory has been known (see JP-A-2015-47429).

  The gaming machine described in the above-mentioned publication includes a front movable effect member supported by a slide bar connected to a single drive source, and a first movable rotatable predetermined angle in conjunction with the movement of the front movable effect member. There is disclosed a gaming machine including a movable presentation material.

  However, in such a gaming machine, only the second movable body (the first movable production role) moves in conjunction with the movement of the first movable body (the front movable production role), which lacks interest. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A gaming machine including a first movable role unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body at a position visible to a player,
The first movable character unit 6000 includes:
A first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) for driving the movable body, a second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100, A third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200,
At least a part of the movable body,
A first movement control in which the first movable mechanism 6100 moves along a first movement path and moves in a first direction and in a direction opposite to the first direction after moving in the first direction. When,
After the first movement control is performed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves at least a partial area on the first movement path in a movement mode different from that of the first movement control. A second movement control that is controlled to return via a second movement path;
After the second movement control is performed, a third movement control in which the third movable mechanism 6300 performs movement control in a movement mode different from the first movement control and the second movement control;
Can be executed.

  With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 are moved by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control having different movement modes. Therefore, the movement of the movable body can be varied and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in a state where the first movable mechanism 6100 has been moved downward by the first movement control, an area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed on the first movement path is empty. In the second movement control and the third movement control, the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved upward in a region where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed, and The space can be used effectively.

  Further, in a state where the second movable mechanism 6200 has been moved upward by the second movement control, an area where the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed on the second movement path is empty. In the third movement control, after the second movement control is executed, the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved downward in an area where the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed, and the space in the gaming machine can be moved. Can be used effectively.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A gaming machine including a first movable role unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body at a position visible to a player,
The first movable character unit 6000 includes:
A first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) for driving the movable body, a second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100, A third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200,
At least a part of the movable body,
A first movement control in which the first movable mechanism 6100 moves along a first movement path and moves in a first direction and in a direction opposite to the first direction after moving in the first direction. When,
After the first movement control is performed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves at least a partial area on the first movement path in a movement mode different from that of the first movement control. A second movement control that is controlled to return via a second movement path;
After the second movement control is executed, a third movement control that is controlled to move on the first movement path by the third movable mechanism 6300;
Can be executed.

  With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 are moved by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control having different movement modes. Therefore, the movement of the movable body can be varied and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in a state where the second movable mechanism 6200 has been moved upward by the second movement control, an area where the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed on the second movement path is empty. In the third movement control, after the second movement control is executed, the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved downward in an area where the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed, and the space in the gaming machine can be moved. Can be used effectively.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A gaming machine including a first movable role unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body at a position visible to a player,
The first movable character unit 6000 includes:
A first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) for driving the movable body, a second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100 and the A third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200,
At least a part of the movable body,
A first movement control in which the first movable mechanism 6100 moves along a first movement path and moves in a first direction and in a direction opposite to the first direction after moving in the first direction. When,
After the first movement control is performed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves at least a partial area on the first movement path in a movement mode different from that of the first movement control. A second movement control that is controlled to return via a second movement path;
After the second movement control is performed, the third movable mechanism 6300 controls the movement to an area other than the second movement path on the first movement path by the second movement control. 3 movement control;
Can be executed.

  With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 are moved by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control, each of which has a different movement mode. The movement of the movable body can be varied and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in a state where the first movable mechanism 6100 has been moved downward by the first movement control, an area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed on the first movement path is empty. In the second movement control and the third movement control, the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved upward in a region where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed, and The space can be used effectively.

Note that the first movable mechanism 6100 is an example of a first movable mechanism.
The second movable mechanism 6200 is an example of a second movable mechanism.
Further, the third movable mechanism 6300 is an example of a third movable mechanism.

  Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the embodiment, the movable body simulates an arm having a hand and a wrist, but is not limited to such an aspect, and various shapes can be adopted.

  Further, the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control are not limited to the above-described modes. For example, the order of each movement control may be appropriately changed. Further, each movement control may be repeated as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, the first direction is the downward direction, but is not limited to such an aspect. Various directions can be adopted as the first direction.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there is provided a game ball sorting device capable of sorting a game ball flowing down a game area into a first passage and a second passage different from the first passage. The technology is publicly known (see JP-A-2006-130126).

  The above-mentioned publication discloses a technique of distributing a flowing game ball to a first slope and a second slope on a center role by a movable piece that moves to a retreat position and an appearance position in accordance with extension and expansion and contraction of a solenoid plunger. Have been. Thus, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, when the movable piece is driven at high frequency for a long time, the spring returning to the retracted position when not energized is deteriorated, and the spring cannot return to the retracted position properly, or the solenoid body and the plunger are not connected to each other. Problems such as the contact surface being shaved and rattling, the dust generated by the shaving of the members hardening and the plunger not expanding and contracting properly, and the dust generated by the rubbing of the movable piece and the passage member hardening and malfunctioning. was there.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing occurrence of a malfunction of a movable piece.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down;
A game ball sorting device 7200 capable of sorting game balls flowing down the game area 20 to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (unfavorable course) different from the first passage;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game ball distribution device 7200 includes:
A movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) movable to a first position for guiding a game ball to the first passage, and a second position for guiding a game ball to the second passage;
Electrical driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220;
Connecting means (a long hole 7222a and a protrusion 7231) for connecting the movable piece 7220 and the electric driving means;
Including
The electric drive means,
When the flapper 7230 (driving unit) connected to the connection unit is in the energized state, the movable piece 7220 is in the first state in which the movable member 7220 is at the first position. The movable piece 7220 shifts to a second state in which the movable piece 7220 is at the second position by its own weight.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing occurrence of a malfunction of the movable piece.

  Specifically, the drive unit (flapper 7230) is configured to move to a position where the movable piece closes the communication hole by its own weight. Therefore, a spring for shifting the drive unit to the position is not required. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the spring is deteriorated and the spring does not return to the retracted position properly.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down;
The game balls flowing down the game area 20 are distributed to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (unfavorable course) different from the first passage through an upper passage 7030 (guide passage). A possible game ball distribution device 7200,
A gaming machine equipped with
The upper passage 7030 includes:
A communication hole 7031 communicating with the first passage;
The game ball distribution device 7200 includes:
A movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) provided to be swingable around an axis (first pin 7211) provided at a position separated from the upper passage 7030;
Electrical driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220;
Including
The movable piece 7220 is
By swinging downward, the communication hole 7031 is separated from the communication hole 7031 to open the communication hole 7031, and the opening of the communication hole 7031 guides the game ball to the first passage, and swings upward. By moving, the communication hole 7031 is closed in proximity to the communication hole 7031, and the communication hole 7031 is formed to be movable to a second position for guiding a game ball to the second passage by closing the communication hole 7031. In addition, even when the movable piece 7220 moves to the second position, it is kept in a non-contact state with the first passage, and can move from the first position to the second position by the weight of the movable piece 7220. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing occurrence of a malfunction of the movable piece.

  Specifically, the swing shaft (first pin 7211) of movable piece 7220 is provided separately from upper passage 7030, so that the swing shaft (first pin 7211) and upper passage 7030 are connected. There is no sliding. Also, the movable piece 7220 is configured to close or open the communication hole 7031 by approaching or separating from the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030 instead of sliding. Therefore, the movable piece 7220 and the upper passage 7030 do not slide. As described above, since the number of sliding portions is very small, it is possible to prevent dust from being generated due to abrasion of the member due to the sliding, and it is possible to suppress occurrence of malfunction of the movable piece.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down;
A game ball sorting device 7200 capable of sorting game balls flowing down the game area 20 to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (unfavorable course) different from the first passage;
A main control circuit 100 (control unit) for controlling the game ball distribution device 7200,
A gaming machine equipped with
The game ball distribution device 7200 includes:
A movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) movable to a first position for guiding a game ball to the first passage, and a second position for guiding a game ball to the second passage;
Electrical driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220;
Including
The flapper 7230 (driving unit) of the electric driving means includes:
A second state in which the movable piece 7220 is in the first position in which the movable piece 7220 is in the first position in the energized state, and in which the movable piece 7220 is in the second position in the non-energized state during the first state. Moved by its own weight to
The main control circuit 100 includes:
The operation of the movable piece 7220 is controlled by switching between an energized state and a non-energized state of the electric drive unit, and the electric drive unit is energized at a predetermined cycle. .

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing occurrence of a malfunction of the movable piece.

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 constantly drives the solenoid 7250 (the opening timing is set to 0.5 seconds and the closing timing is set to 1.5 seconds so as to be alternately repeated). Such a setting is a state in which a malfunction of the movable piece is likely to occur. However, since the drive unit (flapper 7230) is configured to move to a position where the movable piece closes the communication hole by its own weight, a spring for shifting the drive unit to the position is not required. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the spring is deteriorated and the spring does not return to the retracted position properly.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down;
A clune 7100 (game ball guiding device) for guiding the game balls flowing into the device from the game area 20 to take a predetermined trajectory;
A game ball distribution device 7200 capable of distributing game balls flowing down from the clune 7100 to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (unfavorable course) different from the first passage;
A gaming machine equipped with
The crune 7100,
A guiding unit 7110 for guiding a game ball flowing from the outside,
A rolling portion 7120 on which the game ball can roll,
Including
The guide portion 7110 has a bottom surface portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom surface portion 7112,
The rolling part 7120 includes:
A bottom portion 7121 (rolling area) on which the game ball can roll;
A guide wall 7122 for guiding a game ball flowing from the guiding portion 7110;
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge unit) capable of discharging game balls,
Including
The guide wall 7122 is
The connecting portion of the guiding portion 7110 with the one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) is used as a start point so that the flowing game ball takes a circular orbit when rolling while contacting with the guiding wall 7122. Part (front side wall part 7113a) is formed in an annular shape ending in a connection part,
At the starting point of the guide wall 7122, a bulging portion 7122a for buffering a collision between the game ball rolling to take a circular orbit and the guide wall 7122 is provided,
The game ball distribution device 7200 includes:
Movable movable to a first position for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge hole 7123a of the clune 7100 to the first passage and to a second position for guiding the game ball to the second passage. Piece 7220 (game ball distribution member),
Electrical driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220;
Including
The flapper 7230 (driving unit) of the electric driving means includes:
A second state in which the movable piece 7220 is in the first position in which the movable piece 7220 is in the first position in the energized state, and in which the movable piece 7220 is in the second position in the non-energized state during the first state. It is characterized by shifting by its own weight.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a game ball guiding device capable of suppressing occurrence of malfunction of the movable piece and appropriately rotating (rolling) the game ball. can do.

  Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a technique of providing a game ball guiding device for guiding a game ball flowing into the device from a game area to take a predetermined trajectory is known (2006-2006). No. 115899).

  The above-mentioned publication discloses a clune provided with a rolling guide surface having a predetermined inclination angle from a through hole provided in the center of the clune toward a side wall around the clune. Thus, the rolling time of the game ball can be given randomness.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, the game ball that has made one round while abutting on the inner wall of the clune, once separates from the inner wall at the inflow port portion, passes through the inflow port, and comes into contact with the inner wall again at the inner wall. There was a problem that it was flipped and smooth rotation was hindered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine provided with a game ball guiding device capable of smoothly rotating (rolling) a game ball.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down;
A clune 7100 (game ball guiding device) for guiding the game balls flowing into the device from the game area 20 to take a predetermined trajectory;
A gaming machine equipped with
The crune 7100,
A guiding unit 7110 for guiding a game ball flowing from the outside,
A rolling portion 7120 on which the game ball can roll,
Including
The guide portion 7110 has a bottom surface portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom surface portion 7112,
The rolling part 7120 includes:
A bottom portion 7121 (rolling area) on which the game ball can roll;
A guide wall 7122 for guiding a game ball flowing from the guiding portion 7110;
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge unit) capable of discharging game balls,
Including
The guide wall 7122 is
The connecting portion of the guiding portion 7110 with the one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) is used as a start point so that the flowing game ball takes a circular orbit when rolling while contacting with the guiding wall 7122. Part (front side wall part 7113a) is formed in an annular shape ending in a connection part,
At a connection portion between the guiding portion 7110 and the rolling portion 7120, a step portion 7130 is provided such that the bottom portion 7121 of the rolling portion 7120 is lower than the bottom portion 7112 of the guiding portion 7110,
The step portion 7130 is
The height of the step portion 7130 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the game ball, and the game ball rolling beyond the end point of the guide wall 7122 takes substantially the same trajectory as the circular trajectory that has rolled so far. It is formed in an annular shape from the end point of the guide wall 7122 to the start point of the guide wall 7122,
A bulge portion 7122a for buffering a collision between the game ball rolling along the step portion 7130 and the guide wall 7122 is provided at a start point portion of the guide wall 7122. It is.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a game ball guiding device that can smoothly rotate (roll) the game balls.

  Specifically, since the bulge portion 7122a is provided at the starting point of the guide wall 7122 of the crow 7100, the game ball smoothly hits the guide wall 7122 at an angle almost parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122. Can be in contact. Therefore, the game ball is not hit by the guide wall 7122, and thus the game ball A can be prevented from being immediately discharged from the discharge hole 7123a to the outside.

  Also, in the conventional pachinko machine described above, since the game balls flowing into the crune uniformly follow the same trajectory, the time from when the game balls flow into the croon to when they fall through the through hole is fixed. There was a problem that it had a nature and was targeted.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine provided with a game ball guiding device capable of expanding the range of randomness of the rolling time of the game ball.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down;
A clune 7100 (game ball guiding device) for guiding the game balls flowing into the device from the game area 20 to take a predetermined trajectory;
A gaming machine equipped with
The crune 7100,
A guiding unit 7110 for guiding a game ball flowing from the outside,
A rolling portion 7120 on which the game ball can roll,
Including
The rolling part 7120 includes:
A bottom portion 7121 (rolling area) on which the game ball can roll;
A guide wall 7122 for guiding the game balls so that the game balls flowing from the guiding portion 7110 take a circular orbit;
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge unit) capable of discharging game balls,
Including
The discharge hole 7123a is
It is characterized by being formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases as it goes downward.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine including a gaming ball guiding device capable of expanding the range of randomness of the rolling time of the gaming ball.

  Specifically, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, the rotation speed of the game ball is hard to decrease. For this reason, the maximum time until the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a can be increased without increasing the size of the clune 7100. For this reason, the range of the randomness of the rolling time of a game ball can be expanded. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to aim at the timing when the communication hole 7031 is closed.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down;
A clune 7100 (game ball guiding device) for guiding the game balls flowing into the device from the game area to take a predetermined trajectory;
A gaming machine equipped with
The crune 7100,
A guiding unit 7110 for guiding a game ball flowing from the outside,
A rolling portion 7120 on which the game ball can roll,
Including
The guide portion 7110 has a bottom surface portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom surface portion 7112,
The rolling part 7120 includes:
A bottom portion 7121 (rolling area) on which the game ball can roll;
A guide wall 7122 for guiding a game ball flowing from the guiding portion 7110;
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge unit) capable of discharging game balls,
Including
The guide wall 7122 is
The connecting portion of the guiding portion 7110 with the one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) is used as a start point so that the flowing game ball takes a circular orbit when rolling while contacting with the guiding wall 7122. Part (front side wall part 7113a) is formed in an annular shape ending in a connection part,
At the starting point of the guide wall 7122, a bulging portion 7122a for buffering a collision between the game ball rolling to take a circular orbit and the guide wall 7122 is provided,
The discharge hole 7123a is
It is characterized by being formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases as it goes downward.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine including a gaming ball guiding device capable of expanding the range of randomness of the rolling time of the gaming ball.

  Specifically, since the bulge portion 7122a is provided at the starting point of the guide wall 7122 of the crow 7100, the game ball smoothly hits the guide wall 7122 at an angle almost parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122. Can be in contact. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation speed of the game ball from decreasing. Further, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rotation speed of the game ball. For this reason, the maximum time until the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a can be increased without increasing the size of the clune 7100. For this reason, the range of the randomness of the rolling time of a game ball can be expanded. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to aim at the timing when the communication hole 7031 is closed.

  As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said structure, Various changes are possible within the range of invention described in a claim.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is set so that the opening timing 0.5 seconds and the closing timing 1.5 seconds are always repeated. The timing time can be set to an appropriate value.

  Further, the shapes of the movable piece 7220 and the flapper 7230 of the game ball sorting device 7200 are not limited, and may be any shapes as long as the effects of the present invention can be exerted.

  Conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine provided with a decoration device (movable accessory unit) capable of executing an effect visually recognizable by a player has been known (see JP-A-2002-143403).

  The gaming machine described in the above publication has a configuration in which a lamp substrate on which a light source is mounted is housed in a lens cover mounted on a front frame in the decoration device, and irradiates light from the light source to the outside via the lens cover. Lighting device.

  However, in such a gaming machine, the light from the light source hardly reaches the lens cover located on the back side of the lamp substrate in the decorative device than the lamp substrate in the decoration device, and the irradiation through the lens cover becomes uneven. There was a problem.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress unevenness in irradiation through a lens member in a decoration device.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A gaming machine provided with a second movable accessory unit 8000 (decorative device) capable of executing an effect visible to a player,
The second movable character unit 8000 includes:
Light emitting means 8281a;
A substrate 8281 on which the light emitting means 8281a is mounted;
A base member 8210 to which the substrate 8281 is mounted;
A lens member 8283 formed of a transmissive member and arranged at a position where light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a can enter.
The lens member 8283 includes:
From the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281, the outer side of at least one end (left end) of the substrate 8281 and the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281 Extending to a position beyond
The base member 8210 includes:
It is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, and is located outside of at least one end (left end) of the substrate 8281 and at a position exceeding the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting unit 8281a on the substrate 8281. In addition, the lens member 8283 is provided at a position where light emitted from an end (left end) of the lens member 8283 can be reflected.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the irradiation via the lens member 8283 in the second movable accessory unit 8000. That is, since the base member 8210 formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light is provided at a position where light emitted from the end of the lens member 8283 can be reflected, light from the light emitting means 8281a is difficult to reach. The light reflected by the base member 8210 can also be made incident on the lens member 8283 located on the back surface side with respect to the mounting surface in 8281, and the occurrence of unevenness in irradiation via the lens member 8283 can be suppressed. it can.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment,
A gaming machine provided with a second movable auditors unit 8000 capable of executing an effect visible to a player,
The second movable character unit 8000 includes:
Light emitting means 8931;
A substrate 8930 on which the light emitting means 8931 is mounted;
A light guiding member 8940 for guiding light emitted from the light emitting means 8931;
A base member 8920 to which the substrate 8930 is mounted;
A lens member 8950 formed of a transmissive member and disposed at a position where light emitted from the light emitting unit 8931 via the light guide member 8940 can enter.
The lens member 8950 includes:
The mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 is located outside of at least one end (fingertip end) of the substrate 8930 from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930. It is extended so as to incline to a position beyond the back,
The light guide member 8940 includes:
The mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 is located outside of at least one end (fingertip end) of the substrate 8930 from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930. The lens member 8950 extends so as to incline in a different manner from the lens member 8950 so as to be located at a position exceeding the rear surface and close to the front end side of the lens member 8950 in the extending direction.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the irradiation via the lens member 8950 in the second movable accessory unit 8000 (decorative device). In other words, by inputting light through the light guide member 8940 from a position where light is difficult to reach and close to the distal end portion of the lens member 8950 in the extending direction, unevenness is caused in irradiation through the lens member 8950. This can be suppressed.

[spec]
Next, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92 shows an outline of (game) specifications in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 92, the “special figure 1” indicates, for example, a prize to the first starting port (the starting port 7071a of the starting port unit 7070 and the baseboard-side advantageous forward path 7072b shown in FIG. 42). In addition, the “special figure 2” indicates, for example, a winning in the second starting port (the second starting port 440 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 shown in FIG. 26). In the following, a prize to the first starting port may be simply referred to as “special figure 1”, and a prize to the second starting port may be simply referred to as “special figure 2”.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the low probability state, the big hit probability is set to 1 / 19.99.8. In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is set to 1/24. In addition, the small hit probability is set to 1/24 in Tokujin Figure 2. As described above, the probability of a small hit based on the special figure 2 is set to be the same as the probability of a large hit based on the special figure 2. Further, the continuation rate is set to 10% in Toku-zu 1 and set to 95% in Toku-zu 2. In this embodiment, a limit (limit) is provided for the number of continuations of the probable change state executed after the end of the big hit, and in the present embodiment, the limit is ten times. When the limit number of times is reached, even if a big hit occurs in the positive change symbol, the state does not shift to the positive change state after the big hit end. For example, in the case of a gaming machine (a so-called V-variable machine) in which a displacement member is opened during a big hit of a positive change symbol (a specific area easy-to-pass symbol) and a game ball passes through a specific area, and then shifts to a positive change state after the end of the big hit. If the current jackpot has reached the limit number of times, even if the user passes through a specific area during the jackpot, the jackpot is usually treated as a jackpot, and the state does not shift to the positive change state after the end of the jackpot.

  In addition, in the special map 1, a 5R (normal) jackpot is selected with a 90% probability as a real round (hit type) (5 rounds of jackpot games are performed, and non-probable changes / non- It will be a time saving state). Similarly, a jackpot of 5R (probability change) is selected with a probability of 10% (5 rounds of the jackpot game are performed, and after the jackpot game, the state changes to the probability change / time saving state).

  In the special map 2, a 4R (normal) big hit is selected with a probability of 5% (four rounds of the big hit game are performed, and after the big hit game, the state changes to a non-probable change / time saving state). Similarly, a big hit of 4R (probable change) is selected with a probability of 45% (a big hit game of four rounds is performed, and after the big hit game, the state becomes a probable change state / time saving state). Similarly, a jackpot of 6R (probability change) is selected with a probability of 10% (a jackpot game of six rounds is performed, and a probability change / time saving state is set after the jackpot game). Similarly, a jackpot of 8R (probability change) is selected with a probability of 40% (a jackpot game of 8 rounds is performed, and after the game of the jackpot, a probability change / time saving state is established). In the following description, a 4R (normal) big hit in the special figure 2 in the probable change / time saving state and a non-probable change / time saving state after the big hit game may be referred to as “fall”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment (second embodiment), even if the big hit of the special figure 1 is made (that is, if the big hit is made when the player hits left), the big hit is made. It is relatively difficult to enter the probable change / time saving state after the game. However, during the time when the probability change / time saving state is once and the big hit of the special figure 2 is made (that is, while right-handed), the probability change / time saving state is set to be relatively long and easy to continue.

  Note that the number of times the probable change state is continued is added (stored) by a predetermined counter of the main control circuit 100. In the special symbol determination process described above, the main control circuit 100 starts counting once from the non-probable change state to the probable change state, and performs a process of adding 1 to the counter value every time a probable change hits. In this way, when the added value becomes 10, the main control circuit 100 determines that the limit has been reached, and shifts from the probable change / time saving state to the non-probable change / time reduction state after the end of the big hit game. The value of the counter is cleared when the state is shifted from the probable change / time saving state to the non-probable change / time saving state.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, various effects are performed in connection with reaching the limit. Therefore, not only the main control circuit 100 but also the sub-control circuit 200 needs to acquire information on whether or not the limit has been reached. The sub-control circuit 200 may acquire information on whether or not the limit has been reached from the main control circuit 100, or may acquire the information by itself having a counter and counting.

  In the present embodiment, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a “JAC game”) for improving the interest of the player is performed. The JAC game is a game performed when the probability change state occurs continuously. For example, in the above-described V probability change machine, a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the specific area is set during the big hit. As long as the game ball passes, the JAC game after the end of the big hit is continued. In this case, the effect in the JAC game may be made different depending on whether the big hit in the special map 1 or the big hit in the special map 2 is performed. A detailed description of the JAC game will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of the number of time savings determined based on the type of big hit and the type of the variation pattern used in the game after the big hit is completed.

  FIG. 93 shows a table (variation pattern table selection table) for selecting the number of times saved and the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is used when the variation pattern is determined (selected) by the main CPU 101 in step S121 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the present embodiment, in the case of 5R (normal) in FIG. In the case of a 4R (normal) big hit in Tokuzu 2, the variation pattern table A is used. In addition, in the case of 5R (probable change) of Toku-zu 1, 4R (probable change) of Toku-zu 2, 6R (probable change) of Toku-zu 2 or 8R (probable change) of Toku-zu 2, ) The variation pattern table B is used. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the jackpot of the certain variation symbol (the symbol easy to pass through the specific area), the variation pattern A is used.

In the case of 4R (probable change) in Toku-zu 2 or 6R (probable change) in Toku-zu 2 or 8R (probable-change) in Toku-zu 2, the fluctuation pattern table C is used as an exception when a limit described later is reached. You. In addition, the number of times for saving time is 100 for 5R (normal) of Toku-zu 1 and 5R (probable change) of Toku-zu 1 until the next big hit. However, when the number of times of the limit is reached, the number of time savings is 100 times. In addition, when 4R (normal) is won during the JAC game, the number of times reduced is 20 times.
In addition, these fluctuation pattern tables A, B, and C can easily select a long-time fluctuation pattern for the special pattern 1 and a short period for the special pattern 2 even in the same fluctuation pattern table. Is easily selected.
After returning to the normal state after the time saving state ends, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table D for the normal game.

  As described above, the variation pattern is selected by the main CPU 101 using each variation pattern table as described above. Although a detailed description is omitted, a plurality of variation patterns are defined in each variation pattern table, and one variation pattern is determined from the plurality of variation patterns by a winning result and a variation pattern selection random number. Is done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern table C is used, a variation pattern (for example, 13) longer than the second variation after the first variation (at the time of the first variation display of the symbol) after reaching the limit. Seconds) is selected. After reaching the limit, not only when the above-mentioned variation pattern table C is used, but also when another variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table D) is used, similarly to the case where the variation pattern table C is used. A variation pattern longer than the second variation and later is selected as the variation. Note that, hereinafter, the first long variation pattern after reaching the limit may be referred to as “variation pattern LG”.

  Next, processing by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  Components (processes) that are the same as or similar to those according to the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Here, among the processes shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the effect pattern determination process in step S1408, the hit start effect determination process in step S1410, the inter-round effect determination process in step S1414, and the hit end effect determination in step S1416. The processing will be described.

  First, the effect pattern determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1431, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect pattern determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect pattern based on a special figure change pattern designating command, which is data indicating the change pattern determined by the main CPU 101, a stop symbol, and the extracted effect determination random value. I do.

  If the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is the variation pattern LG, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect pattern based on the variation pattern LG. Specifically, an effect pattern including an EX mode transition effect described later is determined as the effect pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1432.

  In step S1432, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting effect data according to the determined effect pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  Next, the hit start effect determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1434, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a winning start effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a hit start effect according to the received hit start command or the like. Note that the winning start effect includes an opening (OP) effect described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1435.

  In step S1435, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting effect data according to the determined hit start effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the hit start effect determination process.

  Next, the round effect determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1437, the sub CPU 201 performs the process of determining the effect between rounds. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect between rounds according to the received display command between rounds and the like. The inter-round effects include a round continuation effect described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1438.

  In step S1438, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting effect data according to the determined effect between rounds. When this processing is ended, the sub CPU 201 ends the round effect determination processing.

  Next, the hit end effect determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1441, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a hit end effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a hit end effect according to the received hit end display command or the like. The hit end display command is set when the hit type is JAC4 described later (when the limit is reached) and set when the hit type is other than JAC4 (limit not reached). And an end-of-time display command.

  In this way, different hit end effects are determined according to the hit end effect command when the limit is reached or when the limit is not reached. In this embodiment, the hit end effect includes a result display effect determined according to the hit end display command when the limit is reached, and a first ending effect determined according to the hit end display command when the limit is not reached. And are included. The result display effect and the first ending effect will be described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1442.

  In step S1442, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting effect data according to the determined hit end effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the hit end effect determination process.

[JAC game]
Next, the JAC game will be described in detail.

  First, with reference to FIG. 96, a description will be given of a hit type in the JAC game performed when the gaming state is the probable change / time saving state.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the present embodiment, JAC1, JAC2, JAC3, JAC4, bumping operation, and S-JAC are provided as hit types selected during the JAC game. The “symbols / icons” shown in FIG. 96 indicate contents displayed to notify the player of the type of hit when performing a big hit game in the JAC game. The "corresponding symbol" specifically indicates a symbol corresponding to the hit type of the name shown in FIG.

In each case, first, any of 4R (probable change), 6R (probable change), and 8R (probable change) is selected by the main CPU 101, and then, in the case of 8R (probable change), JAC1 or JAC2 is determined by lottery, but if another 8R (probable change) is stored in the hold, JAC3 is determined, and when the limit is reached, JAC4 is determined. In the case of 6R (probable change) or 4R (probable change), JAC1 is basically determined, but when the limit is reached, JAC4 is determined. When 4R (normal) is selected by the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 determines a collision operation. Further, when the small hit is selected by the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 determines the S-JAC.
As described above, when the hit type is JAC1, 7 (blue) is displayed as a symbol / icon (hereinafter, simply referred to as “icon”), and 8R (probable change), 6R (probable change) or 4R (probable change). ) Indicates a big hit. When the hit type is JAC2, 7 (red) is displayed as an icon to indicate that the hit is 8R (probable change).

  When the hit type is JAC3, V is displayed as an icon to indicate that it is an 8R (probable change) big hit. In addition, as described in “Remarks”, in the case of JAC3, it basically corresponds to 8R (probable change). However, when the fluctuation display (of the symbol) for this JAC3 starts, it is suspended. The jackpot of 8R (probable change) within is also determined. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the two 8Rs (probable change) is determined in this way, even if there is another hold between the two jackpots related to the jackpot of the 8R (probable change), the two 8Rs (probable change) are determined. The effect of the jackpot of (probable change) is performed in series as if it is a jackpot of 16R (probable change) (second prefetching effect described later).

  When the hit type is JAC4, 7 (yellow) is displayed as an icon to indicate that the hit is any of 8R (probable change), 6R (probable change) or 4R (probable change). As described in “Remarks”, JAC4 appears when the limit is reached (the number of continuations is the tenth big hit). In other words, in this case, even if the player passes through the specific area during the jackpot of the probable variable symbol (the symbol easy to pass through the specific area), the probable change / time saving state is not set after the jackpot game, and the non-probability / time saving state is set. As described above, when the hit type is JAC4, after the big hit game, the game is shifted from the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) to a non-probable change / time saving state game (hereinafter referred to as “EX game”). The EX game started when the limit is completed is played 100 times at the maximum (if a big hit is not achieved).

  If the hit type is a sudden hit operation, no icon is displayed and there is no new indication that the hit is a 4R (normal) big hit. More specifically, when the hit type is a bumping operation, the special winning opening 540 is opened four times only for a short time (for example, 1.7 seconds), and an effect related to a change in the game state (mode transition effect). Is performed. If the hit type is a bumping action, the game is shifted from the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) to the EX game (non-probable change / time saving state) after the big hit game (ie, falls). The EX game started when the player falls down is played 20 times at the maximum (if a big hit is not achieved).

  When the hit type is S-JAC, S-JAC is displayed as an icon to indicate that it is a small hit. When the small hit game is performed, the special winning opening 540 is opened once for a short time (for example, 1.7 seconds). Note that a plurality of types of small hits may be provided, and the opening time and the opening pattern may be different for each small hit.

  Next, a screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the variable display is performed during the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 illustrates an example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the execution of the variable display during the JAC game (that is, the probable change / time saving state). The display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a plurality of display areas for displaying various effects and information. Specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a mini symbol display area 1001, a limit count display area 1002, a GC display area 1003, and a JAC number display area 1004.

  The mini symbol display area 1001 is an area for displaying a variable display of the identification symbol. The mini symbol display area 1001 is located at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The identification symbol displayed in the mini symbol display area 1001 is smaller than the game state (non-probable change / non-time saving state) before the JAC game is started, and is off the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The variable display is performed at the position (that is, in a mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize) (for example, see FIG. 128 described later).

  The number-of-limits display area 1002 is an area for displaying the total number of probable variable hit games played up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. The limit number display area 1002 is formed in a semicircular arc shape. In the limit number display area 1002, a total of ten circular lighting units 1005 are displayed. One lighting unit 1005 is lit at the start of the JAC game, and the color of one lighting unit 1005 is changed to white each time a big hit game is performed once. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the limit number display area 1002 indicates that seven big hit games have been played by the present time after the start of the current JAC game.

  The GC display area 1003 is an area for displaying the total number of variable displays (total number of games) performed up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. The GC display area 1003 is located inside the limit number display area 1002 formed in a semicircular shape. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the GC display area 1003 indicates that 324 times of variable display have been performed up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game.

  The JAC number display area 1004 is an area for displaying the total number of JAC numbers performed up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. The number of JACs means the number of times the big winning opening 540 is opened in the big hit game and the small hit game. In other words, the number of JACs means the number of round games in the big hit game (specifically, 8 times in the case of 8R (probable change), for example), and one in the small hit game. In addition, the number of JACs is not the number of times that the special winning opening 540 is opened in the big hit game and the small hit game, but is, for example, the number of the big hit game and the small hit game (that is, the number of times the hit game is performed). Is also good. It should be noted that it is desirable that the number of times of JAC be one even when the small hitting game is released, for example, 0.9 seconds × 2 times.

  The JAC number display area 1004 is located at the upper right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the JAC number display area 1004 indicates that the total number of JACs has been 35 since the start of the current JAC game until the present time.

  As described above, during the JAC game, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the fluctuating display is being performed includes various kinds of display areas, in addition to the fluctuating display of the identification symbol, and various kinds of information on the JAC game. (Specifically, the total number of jackpot games, the total number of fluctuation displays, and the total number of JAC numbers) are displayed. This allows the player to play the game while grasping information on the JAC game while the variable display is being performed during the JAC game. The number of payouts may be displayed in addition to the various types of information described above.

  In addition, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a background screen and a predetermined character are displayed in addition to information on the change of the identification symbol and information on the JAC game. For example, in an example shown in FIG. 97, a state where two characters are performing a battle is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Next, a screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the execution of the big hit game during the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 98 shows a liquid crystal display during a jackpot game (more specifically, a jackpot round period to be described later) during a jackpot game (specifically, a jackpot of 8R (probable change)) during the JAC game. 3 shows an example of a screen displayed on the device 16. The display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a plurality of display areas for displaying various effects and information. Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a JAC symbol display area 1010, a remaining round display area 1011 and a JAC number display area 1004 are provided.

  The JAC symbol display area 1010 is an area for displaying a name of a hit type and a JAC symbol (icon) that has become a big hit. The JAC symbol display area 1010 is located at the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the example shown in FIG. 98, the image (that is, the icon) displayed in the JAC symbol display area 1010 indicates that the hit type of the big hit is JAC1.

  The remaining round display area 1011 is an area for displaying the number of remaining rounds (that is, the remaining number of times the special winning opening 540 is opened in the current big hit game). The remaining round display area 1011 is located at the lower left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the remaining round display area 1011, JAC displays 1012 corresponding to the number of remaining rounds are displayed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, it is displayed immediately after the big hit of 8R (probable change) is started, that is, the number of remaining rounds is eight. Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 98, the JAC display 1012 is deleted each time the special winning opening 540 is opened once (one round is completed).

  The JAC number display area 1004 is the same as the JAC number display area 1004 during the variable display shown in FIG. That is, the JAC number display area 1004 during the execution of the jackpot game displays the total number of JACs performed up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game, similarly to the case of the variable display. it's shown.

  As described above, during the JAC game, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the execution of the jackpot game includes various display areas with various types of information on the JAC game (specifically, a jackpot game). The name of the new hit type, the JAC symbol, the number of remaining rounds, and the total number of JAC numbers) are displayed. This allows the player to play the game while grasping information on the JAC game during the execution of the jackpot game during the JAC game.

  In addition, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a background screen and a predetermined character are displayed in addition to information on the change of the identification symbol and information on the JAC game. For example, in an example shown in FIG. 98, a state where the character is standing with a sword is displayed.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect related to a jackpot game in the case of a jackpot during a JAC game.

  The big hit game is a game that is performed after the symbol having become the big hit is determined and before the next variable display is started. The effects related to the big hit game are mainly performed in three periods: an opening (OP) effect period, a big hit round period, and an end interval period. In the OP effect period, a hit start effect (for example, an opening (OP) effect) is performed. In addition, during the jackpot round period, an effect between rounds (for example, a round continuous effect) is performed. In the end interval period, a hit end effect (for example, an ending (ED) effect) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot is a big hit when the limit is not reached (that is, the JAC game is continued after the big hit game is ended), and the limit is reached (that is, the JAC game is ended after the big hit game is ended). At the same time, the timing at which the ED effect period ends (the timing at which the ED effect ends) is different from each other in the case of a big hit in the case where the EX game is started. Also, the timing is different from the timing of ending the ED effect executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the big hit of the normal big hit or the big change symbol (the easy-to-pass specific pattern).

  First, with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, an effect related to a big hit game in the case of a big hit when the limit is not reached will be described.

  Note that FIG. 99 (a) is a flow of an effect of a big hit game when the limit has not been reached. FIG. 99 (a) shows the lapse of time from the left side to the right side of the paper, and the effect contents performed in response to the lapse of the time. In FIG. 99 (a), it is assumed that the JAC game, which is a probable change / time saving game, continues after the big hit game ends.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), for example, when the hit type becomes JAC1's big hit and 7 (blue) of the symbol (icon) is determined, first, an OP effect period starts, and an opening (OP) effect is performed. In the OP effect, for example, the player is notified that the special winning opening 540 is opened, and an effect is performed to increase the expectation of the player with respect to the acquisition of the prize ball.

  When the OP effect ends, the next is a jackpot round period, and a round continuation effect is started. In the round continuation effect, for example, an effect for notifying the player that the round game will be continued is performed for each round. Further, when the round continuation effect is being performed, the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is as shown in FIG. 98, for example. That is, while the round continuation effect is being performed, the name of the hit type, the JAC symbol, the number of remaining rounds, and the total number of JAC numbers are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  When the round continuation effect ends, the ending (ED) effect is started next in the end interval period. Note that, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the production flow of the jackpot game when the limit has not been reached, the start and end timings of the ED effect are set to be the same as the start and end timings of the end interval period. I have. In the following description, the ED effect when the limit has not been reached is referred to as “first ED effect”. Here, FIGS. 100A and 100B show an example of the effect contents displayed in the first ED effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), in the first ED effect, first, the character "Big hit end !!" is displayed, and the player is notified that the big hit game is ended. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the characters "still more!" Are displayed, and the player is notified that the JAC game will be continued. The first ED effect ends at the end of the end interval period, that is, at the end of the big hit game.

  In this way, when the big hit game ends, the first ED effect (that is, the effect related to the big hit game) also ends similarly, and then the first change of the symbol (first change display) is performed in the probable change / time saving state. At the first variation, an effect related to the variation display is displayed at the same time as the symbol variation display is started.

  As described above, when the hit is a big hit when the limit has not been reached, the effects (the OP effect, the round continuous effect, and the first ED effect) relating to the big hit game are performed at the timing when the effect ends (more specifically, the first effect). The timing at which the ED effect ends) is the same as the timing at which the big hit game ends.

In the present embodiment, the end interval period (ED effect period) is set to a relatively short period (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, by setting the end interval period (ED effect period) to a short period, the next big hit can be made as soon as possible. That is, since many jackpot games can be played within a short period within the limit, it is possible to give the player a chance to acquire many prize balls, and to thereby improve the interest of the player. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots in the special figure 2 (in which the JAC game can be continued) are provided, but these end interval periods are all set to be the same. The ED production period may be set to be the same for a specific winning group (for example, a probable big hit group) and different from other groups (for example, a normal big hit group), or for each big hit type. May be different. The big hit game also performs the same effect as during the JAC game, making it difficult for the player to determine that the big hit is in the big hit, and performing the big hit and the JAC game or the small hit game seamlessly. Good. In this case, the limit display may not be performed, and it may be difficult to recognize when the limiter is reached. In addition, it is possible to make the player select one of the effects during the JAC game as a game for beginners, a game for advanced players, and the like at the time of the first-rate change big hit. Alternatively, the effect of the JAC game to be started thereafter may be determined based on the symbol type, the lottery, and the like at the time of the first probability change big hit. In the case of allowing the player to make a selection, a gaming machine that meets the needs of the player can be provided, and if it is determined at the time of the first-time-variable-big-hit, a tireless gaming machine can be provided.
In addition, as the update timing of the limiter, the number of limiters may be added at the start of the big hit. Also, at the end of the big hit, add the limit number, if the subsequent game is a probability change game, determine whether or not the limit has been reached.If the limit has not been reached, it is determined to be a probability change game, and if the limit has been reached, The limit number may be cleared as a normal game. (These are the cases in which the gaming ball that passes through the specific area (V winning area) and shifts to the probable change state after the end of the big hit can be used for the gaming machine. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that shifts to a probable change state when a game has occurred. Also, a limiter may be applied to the number of occurrences of time-saving games. In addition, the limit number may be added when the big hit is started with the probable symbol, or the limit number may be added when the big hit starts and the probable big bit ends with the probable symbol. In addition, the counting of the limit number is not limited to these configurations as long as the limit number is not different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, FIG. 100, and FIG. 101, a description will be given of an effect relating to a big hit game in the case of a big hit when reaching the limit.

  FIG. 99 (b) is a flow of the effect of the big hit game when the limit is reached. FIG. 99 (b) shows the lapse of time from the left side to the right side of the paper, and the effect contents performed in response to the lapse of time, as in FIG. 99 (a). In FIG. 99 (b), after the end of the end interval period, that is, after the end of the big hit game, the limit is reached, the JAC game (probable change / time saving game) ends, and a new EX game (non-probable change / time saving) is completed. State game) is started.

  In the present embodiment, for example, after the hit type is JAC4 and the symbol (icon) 7 (yellow) is determined, among the effects related to the big hit game when the limit is reached, the OP effect and the round continuous effect are performed. This is the same as the one related to the jackpot game when the limit is not reached. Therefore, among the effects related to the big hit game when the limit is reached, the description of the OP effect and the round continuation effect is omitted. In the following description, it is assumed that the hit symbol whose stop type is JAC4 has the identification symbol stopped and displayed as “111”.

  When the round continuation effect ends, the ending (ED) effect period is started by starting the end interval period, and the ending (ED) effect is started. The ED effect at the time of reaching the limit includes a result display effect and an EX game shift effect.

  In the result display effect, in the JAC game, an effect of notifying the player that the big hit game has ended and that the limit has been reached is performed. Here, FIGS. 100 (c) and (d) show an example of the effect contents displayed in the result display effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), in the result display effect, similarly to the first ED effect when the limit has not been reached (see FIG. 100 (a)), first, the “big hit end !!” Characters are displayed, and the player is notified that the big hit game is over. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), unlike the first ED effect when the limit is not reached (see FIG. 100 (b)), the characters “Result Announcement !!” and “Rank S” are displayed. , The evaluation (achievement) of the player's game in the JAC game is notified.

  Here, the result display effect is performed during a period (that is, an end interval period) corresponding to the first ED effect when the limit is not reached, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b). Specifically, the timing at which the result display effect starts and ends is set to be the same as the timing at which the first ED effect when the limit has not been reached starts and ends. In other words, the timing at which the result display effect ends is the same as the timing at which the big hit game ends (the timing at which the end interval period ends).

  When the result display effect ends in this way, the remaining EX game shift effect of the ED effect is next performed. That is, the ED effect (first ED effect) when the limit has not been reached shown in FIG. 99 (a) ends at the timing when the big hit game ends (timing when the end interval period ends). The ED effect at the time of reaching the limit indicated in the parentheses) continues without ending at the timing when the big hit game ends (timing when the end interval period ends).

As described above, the EX game transition effect is performed after the big hit game ends (after the end interval period ends). That is, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the EX game transition effect is started at the same time as the first change (first change display) after the big hit game ends (after the end interval period ends). Thus, the EX game transition effect is performed in parallel with the first variation display. In the present embodiment, the EX game transition effect is set to, for example, a period of 10 seconds.
If there is no hold at the end of the big hit, the game is stopped in a state where the result display effect in the ED effect is displayed, and when a new start winning is generated, the EX game transition effect is started.

  Here, in the first variation after reaching the limit, the variation pattern LG is selected as the variation pattern as described above. In other words, the first variation after reaching the limit is set to a longer period than when another variation pattern is selected (second variation and thereafter). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern LG is specified to be, for example, 13 seconds. Therefore, the EX game transition effect is started at the same time as the first variation display, but ends in the middle of the first variation display (specifically, the remaining three seconds remain).

  In the EX game transition effect, an effect is provided to notify the player that the JAC game has ended and the EX game will be started next. Here, FIGS. 101A to 101C show an example of the effect contents displayed in the EX game transition effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the EX game transition effect, first, a state in which the character is full of vitality is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the characters “EX GAME !!” are displayed, and the player is notified of a specific game to be performed next. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), an identification symbol (“111” in FIG. 101 (c)) relating to the big hit which has triggered the big hit game is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this way, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the jackpot game (actually ended) has been continued until now.

  In this manner, the period during which the EX game transition effect is performed is a period of the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game, but it is as if the jackpot game is still continued, and while the jackpot game is continued, the jackpot game is performed. It is possible to give the player an impression as if an effect (ED effect) is being performed.

  Note that the first variation display is performed in parallel with the EX game transition effect, but the variation display is small, as shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and (b), and This is performed at a position deviated from the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (that is, in a mode that is difficult for a player to visually recognize). That is, the player who has the impression that the big hit game is still continuing (that is, the fluctuation display of the next first fluctuation has not been started) is discomforted by actually visually recognizing the fluctuation display. I try not to. After the end of the ED effect, the identification symbol in FIG. 101 (c) starts to be displayed in a variable manner, but the small variable display portion at the lower right may be continuously displayed or may not be displayed. Good. Alternatively, the display of the identification symbol may be deleted once, and the small fluctuation display at the lower right may be moved to the center while being enlarged to start the fluctuation.

  When the EX game transition effect ends, an effect related to the first variation display is performed using the remaining period (for example, 3 seconds) of the first variation. That is, the variation display of the identification symbol of the first variation is stopped and displayed in the remaining period, and then the second variation is started.

  As described above, as described above, in the JAC game, it is required to promote high-speed digestion of the number of big hit games, and thus the period for performing the ED effect is set to a short period (for example, 5 seconds). However, when the limit is reached, it is necessary to notify the player of the results of the player in the JAC game, for example, by the result display effect, and information on a specific game, etc. to be performed next by the EX game shift effect. Therefore, in the short period as described above, it may be assumed that all necessary information cannot be notified to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the limit is reached, the ED effect is not ended at the timing when the big hit game ends (the timing when the end interval period ends), but is continued halfway through the next first variation. Thus, for example, even when all the end interval periods set by the sub CPU 201 are set to be the same, the ED effect is performed in a short period when the limit is not reached, and the ED effect is performed when the limit is reached (result display). Effects and EX game transition effects) can be performed for a long period of time (for example, 15 seconds). That is, the time management of the effect can be facilitated.

[Read-ahead production]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a start memory (start information) acquired at the time of a prize when a game ball wins in the first start port or the second start port. Data (big hit determination random number, symbol determination random number, etc.) is reserved. In this way, after the variable display of the symbol currently being executed ends, the variable display of the held symbols is started. The number of times of change of the held symbol (the number of times of holding) is displayed on the normal symbol holding display section 72, the first special symbol holding display section 75, the second special symbol holding display section 76, and the liquid crystal display device 16. You.

  Further, on the liquid crystal display device 16, as the display of the number of times of suspension, spherical icons of a number corresponding to the number of times of suspension are displayed. Hereinafter, the spherical icon is referred to as a “reserved ball”. The holding ball is associated with various data (information) obtained at the time of winning the starting opening that triggered the selection of the symbol corresponding to the holding ball. In this manner, in the present embodiment, the hit determination is performed on the symbol corresponding to the reserved ball based on the information of the reserved ball, and a predetermined effect (pre-reading effect) is performed based on the determination result. In addition, among the pre-reading effects, an effect related to the appearance (display mode) of the icon based on the determination result may be referred to as a reserved pre-reading effect.

  Whether to perform the pre-reading effect is determined by the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 94A) by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) as described above. More specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a part of the effect pattern based on a special figure change pattern designating command, which is data indicating the change pattern determined by the main CPU 101, a stop symbol, an extracted effect determination random value, and the like. It is determined whether or not to perform a prefetch effect (see step S1431). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect includes a first pre-reading effect, a second pre-reading effect, and a holding consecutive suggestion effect during the small hit game, which will be described later.

  Hereinafter, before giving a detailed description of the prefetching effect, an outline of the display of the reserved ball will be described.

  In the following description, for the sake of convenience, a drawing in which a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is simplified is used. For example, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays three decorative symbols (variable display), and also includes the reserved sphere display area 1100 and the reserved sphere display area 1200 (see FIG. 105).

  The reserved ball display area 1100 is an area for displaying, as an image of the reserved ball, the reserved information corresponding to the starting memory that is the basis during the variable display of the identification symbol (the first variable display in the case of the pseudo series). And is located at the lower left of the screen. Also, when the identification symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and at least one reserved ball is displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200, the reserved ball display area 1200 is switched to the reserved ball display area 1100. One holding ball is displayed to move.

  The reserved ball display area 1200 is an area for individually displaying the reserved information corresponding to the first to fourth start memories as side-by-side images of the reserved ball, and is located to the right of the reserved ball display area 1100. In the reserved ball display area 1200, the first retained information stored most recently is displayed as the leftmost reserved ball, and the second to fourth retained information are displayed by a plurality of reserved balls sequentially arranged on the right side of the leftmost reserved ball. Is displayed. In the retained ball display area 1200, basically, every time the leftmost retained ball indicating the first retained information is erased, it is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, and the remaining second to fourth retained information is displayed. If there is a reserved ball indicating, the moving ball is moved and displayed so as to be shifted to the left.

  In the following description, in the reserved ball display area 1200, a region where the first reserved information is displayed as a reserved ball is referred to as a “first reserved ball display region 1201”, and a region where the second reserved information is displayed as a reserved ball. The “second reserved ball display area 1202”, the area where the third reserved information is displayed as the reserved ball, is “third reserved ball display area 1203”, and the area where the fourth reserved information is displayed as the reserved ball is “second reserved ball”. 4 reserved ball display area 1204 ".

[First look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, the first look-ahead effect will be described.

  The first look-ahead effect is a predetermined image (in the present embodiment, a darkened screen) when a reserved ball targeted for the look-ahead effect is displayed so as to move to the reserved ball display area 1100. Is an effect for displaying whether or not the character) appears. The first look-ahead effect is mainly divided into a first effect and a second effect.

  The first effect is an effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened (displayed as being filled in black). When the first effect is performed and the screen is darkened, only three identification symbols, the reserved ball display area 1100 and the reserved ball display area 1200 are displayed on the screen (see FIG. 105). After the reserved ball is displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200, the timing at which the first effect is performed is determined at the time of winning when the starting memory of the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is acquired. The timing at which the first effect is performed is determined using a predetermined table (dark start pattern determination table). It should be noted that a plurality of darkening start pattern determination tables are provided, and one table is selected according to where the reserved ball to be subjected to the first look-ahead effect is displayed first in the reserved ball display area 1200.

  Next, the darkening start pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 102 (a) is a dark start pattern determination table used when a reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the fourth reserved ball display area 1204. In FIG. 102 (a), one pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery from three patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3) excluding the pattern (PTN) 0 in which the first prefetch effect is not performed. In addition, the display of “Reserve-3”, “Reserve-2”, “Reserve-1”, and “Relevant” indicates that the reserve ball first displayed in the fourth reserve ball display area 1204 is moved and displayed thereafter. Indicates the display area.

  More specifically, when the reserved ball is first displayed in the fourth reserved ball display area 1204 and, for example, when the pattern 2 is selected, the reserved ball is displayed as “reserved-3” (third reserved ball display). When the display is moved to the area 1203), "-" is displayed. That is, even when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203, the first effect has not yet been started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not darkened). Next, when this reserved ball is moved and displayed in “Reserved-2” (second reserved ball display area 1202), “dark start” is set. That is, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202, the first effect is started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened).

  Next, when this reserved ball is moved and displayed in “reserved-1” (first reserved ball display area 1201), “darkness continues”. That is, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201, the first effect is continued (the screen remains dark). Next, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in “this” (the reserved ball display area 1100), “the lottery” is obtained. That is, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, a predetermined lottery is performed, and an effect (a second effect described later) according to the result of the lottery is performed.

  FIG. 102 (b) is a dark start pattern determination table used when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203. Similarly, FIG. 102 (c) is a darkening start pattern determination table used when a reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202. When the reserved ball is first displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 or the second reserved ball display area 1202, the first ball is displayed using these tables in accordance with the movement display of the reserved ball at a predetermined timing. The effect is started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened).

  The second effect is an effect that displays whether or not a predetermined character appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 darkened by the first effect. As will be described in more detail later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, when the second effect is performed, first, an effect (EF) composed of high-luminance light particles is displayed on the darkened screen. You. Then, a state (process) in which a predetermined character gradually appears as the particles gather is displayed. Then, either an effect in which the predetermined character completely appears by the effect (appearance effect) or an effect in which the predetermined character does not completely appear (is erased during the appearance) (gase effect) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the second effect, when there is a pending run, may indicate that there is the pending run. have. It should be noted that the holding ream means that when the holding ball that becomes a big hit is moved and displayed in the holding ball display area 1100 (that is, the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the holding ball moved and displayed in the holding ball display area 1100 starts). This means that one or a plurality of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 include a retained ball that will be a big hit.

  The specific contents of the second effect are as follows: when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 (that is, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100). When the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the ball is started), it is determined by a predetermined lottery. Thus, the specific content of the second effect is not the timing at which it is determined to perform the first look-ahead effect (that is, the timing at which the starting memory of the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is acquired). It is determined at a timing at which it is possible to confirm whether or not one or a plurality of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a reserved ball that makes a big hit (that is, a timing at which it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a reserved streak). Is done.

  The specific contents of the second effect are determined using a predetermined table (character appearance availability determination table). A plurality of character appearance availability determination tables are provided, and one table is selected in accordance with a predetermined process. In the above-mentioned predetermined processing, although details will be described later, one table is selected according to the case where the suggestion of the reserved series is not performed and the case where the suggestion of the reserved series may be performed.

  In the following, of the plurality of (two in the present embodiment) character appearance availability determination tables, a table that is selected when the suggestion of a reserved series is not performed is referred to as a “suspended series non-report character selection table”. In addition, a table that is selected when the suggestion of the pending repetition may be performed is referred to as a “reservation consecutive notification character selection table”. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a character A, a character B, a character C, and a character D are provided as the predetermined characters.

  Next, the character appearance availability determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 103 (a) shows a held consecutive non-broadcast character selection table. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the reserved consecutive non-report character selection table is used, one pattern is selected from eight patterns (patterns 1 to 8) by a predetermined lottery. When the reserved ball moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is not a hit (when it is a loss), one of the patterns 1 to 5 is selected. In addition, when the reserved ball moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is a hit, one of the patterns 6 to 8 is selected.

  "Content 1" shown in FIG. 103 (a) indicates that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 has been darkened by the first effect. “Content 2” indicates which character's effect is displayed on the darkened screen. The term “show” indicates whether the character completely appears due to the effect (that is, whether the character is an appearance effect or a gaseous effect). As shown in FIG. 103 (a), except for pattern 1, when the result is incorrect, the gaseous effect is always selected. On the other hand, in the case where the hit is a hit, an appearance effect is always selected.

  FIG. 103 (b) shows a held continuous broadcast character selection table. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the reserved continuous broadcast character selection table is used, one pattern is selected from nine patterns (patterns 1 to 9) by a predetermined lottery. When the reserved ball moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is not a hit (when it is a loss), one of the patterns 1 to 5 is selected. Further, when the reserved ball moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is a hit, one of the patterns 6 to 9 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the reserved continuous broadcast character selection table is used, similar to the case where the reserved continuous non-broadcast character selection table shown in FIG. 103 (a) is used, pattern 1 is used. Except, if the result is incorrect, the gaseous production is always selected. On the other hand, in the case where the hit is a hit, an appearance effect is always selected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the pending consecutive broadcast character selection table, unlike the pending consecutive non-announced character selection table, pattern 9 is defined as a selectable pattern in case of a hit. Thus, in the case where the suggestion of the hold sequence may be performed, when the pattern 9 is selected, the effect of the character D is displayed, and the character D completely appears by the appearance effect. On the other hand, when the reserved consecutive non-notification character selection table is used, that is, when the suggestion of the reserved consecutive is not performed, the character D does not appear completely due to the appearance effect. Thus, when the character D completely appears in the first look-ahead effect, it is suggested that there is a pending run.
The production contents of the first production and the second production may be determined for both the first production and the second production when a hold to be the first prefetch production is made, The content of the first effect may be determined when a certain hold occurs, and the content of the second effect may be determined when the variable display of the hold targeted for the first look-ahead effect is performed. In addition, after determining the production contents of the first production and the second production, if it is a probable change big hit and has not reached the limiter, the production contents of the second production may be changed, or the first production and the second production may be changed. 2 After the decision of the production contents of the production, if there is a certain change big hit in the suspension when the fluctuation display of the suspension to be the first look-ahead production is performed, the content of the second production is changed once, but the limit is reached thereafter If it is determined that the second effect is performed, the second effect may be executed based on the effect contents before the change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a description will be given of a process of selecting a held continuous broadcast character selection table and a held continuous non-broadcast character selection table.

  The table selection process related to the character appearance availability determination table is executed in the effect pattern determination process by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201).

  In step S1451, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is being executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is not being executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1452. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is being executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1453. Note that “the first effect is being executed” refers to a pattern (for example, pattern 1 or the like) other than the pattern 0 in which the first look-ahead effect is not performed in each of the darkening start pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is actually darkened.

  In step S1452, the sub CPU 201 executes a first effect determination process. In the first effect determination process, whether or not to execute the first effect is determined using the darkening start pattern determination table as described above, and if it is determined to execute the first effect, the first effect is determined. Is started (timing at which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened). When executing the first effect determination process, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  In step S1453, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the suspension related to the execution of the first effect is the current fluctuation. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball that has been the target of the first look-ahead effect is being displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the suspension relating to the execution of the first effect is the current fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1454. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the suspension related to the execution of the first effect is not the current fluctuation, the effect pattern determination process ends.

  In step S1454, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of a hit type with a hit type. Note that the hit type of the hit operation is the hit of the 4R (normal) of the special figure 2 in the corresponding symbol. That is, the big hit in which the hit type is the sudden action is a big hit that shifts from the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) to the EX game (non-probable change / time saving state) after the big hit game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of the hitting operation, the process proceeds to step S1455. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the retained ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 does not have the hit type of the hit operation, the process proceeds to step S1456.

  In step S1456, sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of a specific type (hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3). The big hit with the hit type of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is a big hit with a corresponding symbol of 4R (probable change), 6R (probable change), or 8R (probable change) of Tokujin Figure 2. In other words, the jackpot whose hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is a jackpot in which the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) continues after the jackpot game. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 does not have a specific type of jackpot, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1455. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a specific type of jackpot, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1457.

  In step S1457, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the limit has been reached (whether or not the number of continuations is the tenth big hit) based on the result of the hit determination of the symbol corresponding to the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect. judge. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to shift from the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) to the EX game (non-probable change / time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game by the jackpot of the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect. Is determined. When determining that the limit has not been reached, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1458. On the other hand, when determining that the limit has been reached, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1455.

  In step S1458, the sub CPU 201 determines the specific contents of the second effect among the first look-ahead effects (more specifically, the specific contents of the second effect in a case where the suggestion of the hold sequence may be performed). Is selected as a character appearance availability determination table for determining the character information. After processing in step S1458, sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1449.

  Also, (when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S1454 that there is a 4R (normal) jackpot in the special figure 2 on hold, or in step S1456, the sub CPU 201 sets the 4R (probable change) of the special figure 2 on hold. In a case where it is determined that there is no big hit, or in a case where it is determined in Step S1457 that the sub CPU 201 has reached the limit, in Step S1455, the sub CPU 201 executes the specific of the second effect among the first look-ahead effects. As a character appearance availability determination table for determining the appropriate content (more specifically, the specific content of the second effect when the suggestion of the hold sequence is not performed), the hold sequence non-broadcast character selection table is selected. After processing in step S1455, sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1449.

  In step S1449, sub CPU201 executes a second effect determination process. In the second effect determination process, as described above, using the hold continuous broadcast character selection table selected in step S1458 or the hold continuous non-broadcast character selection table selected in step S1455, the specific second performance is determined. Determine the content. When executing the second effect determination process, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  As described above, in the effect pattern determination process, when there is a big hit that is a bumping action on the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 (YES in step S1454), or after the jackpot is played on the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200, the JAC is played. If there is no jackpot of JAC1, JAC2, or JAC3 in which the game (probable change / time saving state) continues (NO in step S1456), or if the limit has been reached (YES in step S1457), a suggestion of a hold series is given. Is undesired (or unnecessary), and selects a held consecutive non-notification character selection table to determine the specific contents of the second effect among the first look-ahead effects.

  On the other hand, if there is no big hit that is a hit operation on the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 (NO in step S1454), and after the large hit game is played on the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200, the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) If there is a jackpot of JAC1, JAC2, or JAC3 that continues (YES in step S1456), and if the limit has not been reached (NO in step S1457), there is no problem even if suggestion of a pending run is made. Then, the user selects the pending consecutive notification character selection table to determine the specific contents of the second effect among the first look-ahead effects.

  Next, an example of specific contents of the first look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

  First, as a premise, it is assumed that, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the current situation is during a JAC game and symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is also assumed that the next big hit does not reach the limit. It is also assumed that two reserved balls are displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 (first reserved ball display area 1201 and second reserved ball display area 1202). Further, it is assumed that both of the two reserved balls are lost.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (a), when a winning port is won, a reserved ball is displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 as shown in FIG. 105 (b). Here, it is assumed that the reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 is a big hit.

  For convenience, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (b), the reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 (that is, the reserved ball with the big hit) is referred to as “one reserved ball per hit”. The reserved ball displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is referred to as “reserved ball 1”. Further, the reserved ball displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is referred to as “reserved ball 2”. Also, in the drawing, marks ("1", "2", "this 1") are added to the reserved balls to facilitate identification of the reserved balls.

  In the following, it is assumed that when one reserved ball is displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203, the first look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern.

  In such a case, since the reserved ball corresponding to the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203, using the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. The specific content of the first effect is determined. Here, it is assumed that the pattern 1 is selected by a predetermined lottery from a plurality of patterns defined in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  When a predetermined period elapses from the state shown in FIG. 105B, the state shown in FIG. 105C is obtained. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the change display of the identification symbol is stopped at the lost symbol.

  After the state shown in FIG. 105C, the state shown in FIG. 105D is obtained. Specifically, the reserved ball 1 displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100. Accordingly, the identification symbol corresponding to the reserved ball 1 is variably displayed. Further, the reserved ball 2 displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201. Also, the one reserved ball that was displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 is moved and displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202.

  Here, since the hit one holding ball displayed in the third holding ball display area 1203 is moved and displayed in the second holding ball display area 1202, it is specified in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. 102 (b). According to the pattern 1, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened. As a result, on the screen, only the three identification symbols, the reserved ball display area 1100 and the reserved ball display area 1200 are in a visible state.

  When a predetermined period elapses from the state shown in FIG. 105 (d), the state shown in FIG. 105 (e) is obtained. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (e), the change display of the identification symbol corresponding to the reserved ball 1 is stopped with the lost symbol.

  After the state shown in FIG. 105 (e), the state becomes the state shown in FIG. 105 (f). Specifically, the reserved ball 2 displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100. Accordingly, the identification symbol corresponding to the reserved ball 2 is variably displayed. In addition, the one reserved ball displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201. Further, the darkening of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is continued according to the pattern 1 defined in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  In this state, if two game balls win the starting port, for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (f), a new reserved ball (referred to as “reserved ball 3”) is displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202. Is displayed, and a new reserved ball (referred to as “hit 2 reserved balls”) is displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 in the same manner. Here, it is assumed that the new reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 is a big hit. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 105 (f) is such that one reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is a big hit and one or more reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200. , There is a reserved ball with a big hit, so that it is in a state of a reserved ream (in this case, the condition that the limit number has not been reached when a big hit is generated by two reserved balls per hit).

  When a predetermined period elapses from the state shown in FIG. 105 (f), the state shown in FIG. 105 (g) is obtained. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the change display of the identification symbol corresponding to the reserved ball 2 is stopped at the lost symbol.

  After the state shown in FIG. 105 (g), the state shown in FIG. 105 (h) is obtained. Specifically, the hit two reserved balls displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 are moved and displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202. Further, the reserved ball 3 displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201.

  In addition, the one reserved ball displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100. In addition, the identification symbol corresponding to one hit ball is variably displayed. In addition, the three identification symbols are moved to the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and are displayed in a reduced size. Thus, a space for a predetermined effect (specifically, a second effect) is secured in the center of the screen.

  In the state shown in FIG. 105 (h), that is, when the first reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, the character appearance availability determination table shown in FIG. 103 is displayed. Is used, the specific content of the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is determined. Here, it is assumed that the pattern 9 specified in the hold continuous broadcast character selection table shown in FIG. 103B has been selected.

  Thus, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (h), when the pattern 9 specified in the hold continuous notification character selection table is selected, the first effect ends and the second effect starts with the screen darkened. As shown in FIG. 106 (a) and FIG. 106 (b), an effect (EF) composed of high-luminance light grains is displayed on the darkened screen. Then, a state (process) in which the character D gradually appears as the particles gather is displayed. Then, in the state shown in FIG. 106 (c), the character D appears completely by the effect, and the darkening of the screen is eliminated. Thus, the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the character D appears due to the appearance effect is limited to the case where there is a pending run. That is, when the character D appears by the appearance effect, it is possible to suggest a hold sequence to the player.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first effect ends, a darkened screen is displayed, and when the second effect starts, an effect (EF) is displayed on the darkened screen. Things. As described above, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. Thus, the first look-ahead effect includes the first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second effect of causing a predetermined character to appear on the screen darkened by the first effect by using an effect. By combining them, it is possible to suggest a pending run without causing a sense of incongruity in the connection between the first effect and the second effect. As described above, by performing an effect using a combination of light particles having high brightness with respect to black (that is, an interrelated effect of performing a first effect that shows the effect contents of the second effect), a game is played. Can improve the interest of the elderly.

  In the state shown in FIG. 106 (c), the change display of the identification symbol corresponding to one hit ball is stopped at the big hit symbol.

  Thus, an example of the specific content of the first look-ahead effect when the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed has been described with reference to FIGS. 105 (a) to 106 (c). Next, an example of the specific content of the first look-ahead effect in the case where the gassed effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed will be described.

  Here, it is assumed that the reserved ball newly displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 shown in FIG. 105 (f) (hereinafter referred to as “losed reserved ball”) has been lost. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (h), that is, when the lost ball that has been the target of the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, the connected ball shown in FIG. It is assumed that pattern 5 specified in the broadcast character selection table has been selected.

  In this case, up to the state shown in FIG. 106 (b), the same image as when the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed is displayed. That is, an effect (EF) composed of high-luminance light grains is displayed on the darkened screen. Then, a state (process) in which the character D gradually appears as the particles gather is displayed. However, after the state shown in FIG. 106 (b), as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the effect that the character D does not completely appear (is erased during the appearance) due to the scattering of light particles (effects). (Gase production) is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 106 (d), the change display of the identification symbol corresponding to the lost ball is stopped at the lost symbol.

[Second look-ahead effect]
Hereinafter, the second look-ahead effect will be described.

  The second look-ahead effect is an effect performed when there is a reserved run of jackpots of 8R (probable change) in FIG. Specifically, in the second look-ahead effect, the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 has two big hits of 8R (probable change) in the special figure 2 and any of the big hit reserved balls is limited to the limit. If not reached, JAC3 is displayed at the time of the first 8R (probable change) big hit, giving the player the impression that a 16R probable change has occurred.

  In the second look-ahead effect, an effect is performed as if the process from the end of the big hit of the first set 8R (probable change) to the start of the big hit of the second set 8R (probable change) continues. In this manner, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the jackpot of the first set of 8R (probable change) and the jackpot of the second set of 8R (probable change) are continuous (series) (that is, 16R (probable change)) ) Can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, there is a state in which there are two big hits (hit type is JAC3) of 8R (probable change) in the special figure 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as a “state in which the second prefetching effect can be performed”). ), When the second look-ahead effect is selected as an effect pattern, even if another lost ball is displayed between the two 8R (probable) reserve balls, Perform a second look-ahead effect. However, even when the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as an effect pattern, a small hit is held between two 8R (probable change) holding balls. When the ball is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is not performed.

  First, before explaining the effect flow of the second look-ahead effect, the effect of the jackpot effect of the big hit (the hit type is JAC1) of 8R (probable change) in FIG. The flow will be described.

  FIG. 107 is an effect flow of a jackpot effect of the big hit (the hit type is JAC1) of 8R (probable change) in Tokuju 2 when the second look-ahead effect is not performed. In the following, the big hit effect may be referred to as a “normal 8R (probable change) big hit effect”.

  As shown in FIG. 107, when the 8R (probable change) symbol of the special figure 2 is determined, the big hit game of 8R (probable change) is started. When the big hit game is started, an OP effect period starts, and an opening (OP) effect is performed. In the OP effect, an effect is performed to notify the player that a big hit game is to be started from now. Specifically, for example, the effect that the player is notified that the big winning opening 540 is opened and that the expectation of the player regarding the acquisition of the prize ball is raised are performed.

  When the OP effect ends, the next is a jackpot round period, and a round continuation effect is started. In the round continuation effect, for example, an effect for notifying the player that the round game will be continued is performed for each round. The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the current number of rounds (1R, 2R,..., 8R).

  When the round continuation effect ends, the ending (ED) effect period is next started, and the ending (ED) effect is started. In the first ED effect, the player is notified of the end of the big hit game, and is notified of the continuation of the JAC game. The ED effect ends at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a description will be given of a flow of a large hit effect when the second prefetch effect is performed.

  In addition, FIG. 108 is an effect flow of the jackpot effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed. In FIG. 108, the effect flow of the first set (the first big hit game) and the effect flow of the second set (the second big hit game) are described separately in upper and lower rows. In the following, in the big hit effect in the case where the second look-ahead effect is performed, the description of the same effect content as the normal 8R (probable change) big hit effect will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 108, when the 8R (probable change) symbol of the special figure 2 is determined, the big hit game of 8R (probable change) is started. In the present embodiment, the hit type when the second look-ahead effect is performed is JAC3, and “V” is displayed as a symbol (icon) of the big hit (see FIG. 96 and the like). When the big hit game of the first set is started, the OP effect period is first set, and the OP effect of the first set is performed. In the OP effect of the first set, an effect is performed to notify the player that a big hit game is to be started from now.

  When the OP effect of the first set ends, the next is a big hit round period, and the continuous continuation effect of the first set is started. The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the current number of rounds (1R, 2R,..., 8R).

  When the round continuation effect of the first set ends, the ending (ED) effect period is next set, and the ED effect of the first set is started. In the first set of ED effects, unlike a normal 8R (probable change) big hit effect, the player is not notified that the big hit game ends, the JAC game continues, or the like. The ED effect of the first set ends at the same time as the end of the big hit game, similarly to the normal big hit effect of 8R (probable change). In the above embodiment, the ED effect is performed after the first set, but the ED effect may not be performed. In that case, the first set and the second set can give the player a feeling like one big hit.

  When the big hit game of the first set is completed, a continuous continuous production (referred to as a “serial continuous production” for convenience) is performed next as a fluctuating production. Here, a series of consecutive pending effects refers to the lost ball displayed before the second 8R (probable) reserved ball and the second 8R (probable) reserved ball. It is a production that is done. In the series of continuous holding effects, the symbol corresponding to the lost ball is displayed in a small size, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable display and the variable stop of the symbol.

  In addition, in the series of consecutive productions, the symbol of 8R (probable change) of the second special figure 2 is determined. Here, similarly to the first set, “V” is displayed as a symbol (icon) of the second set.

  When the second set jackpot game is started in this way, the OP effect period is first set, and the second set of OP effects is performed. In the second set of OP effects, unlike the first set of OP effects, an effect for notifying the player that the big hit game is to be started is not performed.

  When the OP effect of the second set ends, the next big hit round period starts, and the second set of continuous round effects is started. The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the number of rounds (9R, 10R,..., 16R) obtained by adding 8 to the actual number of rounds as the current number of rounds.

  When the second set of continuous round effects is completed, the ending (ED) effect period is next set, and the second set of ED effects is started. In the second set of ED effects, unlike the first set of ED effects, the player is notified that the big hit game is finished and the JAC game is continued. The ED effect of the second set ends at the same time as the end of the second set jackpot game.

  In this way, in the second look-ahead production, it is as if a series of suspension continuous productions and the like continues from the end of the big hit of the first set 8R (probable change) to the start of the big hit of the second set 8R (probable change). Direction is performed. In this manner, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the jackpot of the first set of 8R (probable change) and the jackpot of the second set of 8R (probable change) are continuous (series) (that is, 16R (probable change)) ) Can be given to the player.

  Here, as described above, when the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, another between the 8R (probable change) pending balls is another. Even when the lost ball is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is performed. However, even when the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, a small hit holding ball between two 8R (probable change) holding balls. Is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is not performed.

  Therefore, in the following, using the flowchart of FIG. 109, when the second prefetching effect can be performed, a process of determining whether to actually perform the second prefetching effect (second prefetching effect execution) The determination process will be described.

  The second look-ahead effect execution determination process shown in FIG. 109 is performed in the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 94A) by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) as described above.

  In step S1461, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the second prefetch effect is selected as the effect pattern. The selection of the second prefetching effect is determined based on a special figure changing pattern designating command, which is data indicating the changing pattern determined by the main CPU 101, a stop symbol, an extracted effect determining random value, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the second prefetch effect is selected as the effect pattern, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1462. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the second look-ahead effect has not been selected as the effect pattern, the sub-CPU 201 ends the second look-ahead effect execution determination process.

  In step S <b> 1462, the sub CPU 201 sets a small hit to the left (previous) of the 8R big hit (hit type is JAC3) of the reserved ball of the special figure 2 in the plurality of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200. It is determined whether or not there is a pending ball of (hit type is S-JAC). If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no reserved ball with a small hit on the left side (before) of the reserved ball with the big hit of 8R in Tokujingu 2, the process moves to step S1463. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a small hit reserved ball on the left side (before) of the 8R big hit reserved ball of FIG. 2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1464.

  In step S1463, the sub CPU 201 determines to actually perform the selected second prefetch effect. After that, the sub CPU 201 ends the second prefetching effect execution determination process.

  In step S1464, the sub CPU 201 determines not to actually perform the selected second prefetching effect. In this case, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the second look-ahead effect, but performs a big hit effect of the big hit (the hit type is JAC1) of 8R (probable change) in Tokuju 2 (see FIG. 107). After that, the sub CPU 201 ends the second prefetching effect execution determination process.

  By such processing, even if the second look-ahead effect is in a state where the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, between the two 8R (probable change) reserved balls. When the small hit reserve ball is displayed, the second look-ahead effect can be stopped.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that, in the case where the second look-ahead effect is performed, a small hitting reserved ball is displayed between two reserved balls of 8R (probable change). In such a case, by performing the small hitting game, an effect is produced as if the big hit from the end of the big hit of the first set 8R (probable change) to the start of the big hit of the second set 8R (probable change) continues. Can not. That is, when the small hit game is performed, it is possible to give the player an impression that the big hit of the first set of 8R (probable change) and the big hit of the second set of 8R (probable change) are continuous (series). The inconvenience of being unable to do so occurs.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the second prefetching effect is in a state in which the second prefetching effect can be performed and the second prefetching effect is selected as the effect pattern, the distance between the two 8R (probable change) reserved balls is changed. In the case where a small hitting reserve ball is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is stopped to prevent the above-described inconvenience when the second look-ahead effect is performed. .
In the above example, two big hits including the hold run are executed. However, there is a case where the maximum of four holds becomes the 8R probability variable big hit, in which case it is possible to display up to 40R. It is.
In the above example, the ED effect is performed at the end of the first set of the 8R big hit. However, the ED effect is not performed, and the effect is continued just before the end of the 8R. You may make it continue. However, in such a case, since there is a time of loss change on the way and an OP time for the second set of 8R big hit, a display such as "R start preparation" is displayed between 8R and 9R in the effect. desirable. Further, it is desirable that a lottery value is set so that a short loss variation pattern during the JAC game is easily selected. However, if a long-term variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern of the loss, there is a possibility that the preparation time will be long. Therefore, the variation time of the loss between the first set and the second set is also read ahead, and the In this case, the second prefetch effect may not be performed. Specifically, when the variation pattern is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), the second prefetch is set to the permitted state and JAC3 is displayed, and the variation pattern for more than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds or more, Time, etc.), the second effect is prohibited.
In the above example, if there is a small hit between the first set of 8R big hits and the second set of 8R big hits, the second look-ahead effect is not performed, but may be performed. In that case, 1R to 8R is executed in the first set of 8R big hits, and then, in the small hit executed before the second set of 8R big hits, the ninth R in the performance is executed, and then the second set of 8R big hits is performed. In the above, 10R to 17R in the effect may be executed. Further, when there are two small hits on the way, 11R to 18R in the effect may be executed in the second set of 8R big hits.
In the above-described embodiment, the probable change / time saving state is described as an example of the specific game, and the non-probable change / time reduction state is described as an example of the non-specific game. However, various examples are also available. For example, as a specific game, a probable change / time saving state or a non-probable change / time reduction state may be used. Further, as an example of a specific game, a non-probable change / time saving state may be used, and as a non-specific game state, a non-probable change / no time saving state may be used.

[Suggested staging during small hits]
In the following, a description will be given of a holding consecutive suggestion effect performed during the small hit game.

  The holding continuous suggestion effect performed during the small hit game indicates that, when a small hit game is performed in the JAC game, the holding ball displayed in the holding ball display area 1200 has a specific type of big hit. It is a production to do. In addition, in this embodiment, a big hit of a specific type means a big hit whose hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3. In other words, the specific type of jackpot means a jackpot that does not shift to the EX game (non-probable change / time saving state) (the probable change / time saving state is continued) when the jackpot game ends in the JAC game. The hold consecutive suggestion effect is performed using a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the execution of the small hit game during the JAC game will be described below with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a plurality of display areas for displaying various effects (information). Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a JAC symbol display area 1010, a JAC number display area 1004, and a prize ball number display area 1013 are provided.

  Note that the JAC symbol display area 1010 and the JAC number display area 1004 are the same as the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the execution of the big hit game shown in FIG. Is omitted. Note that an icon “S-JAC” is displayed in the JAC symbol display area 1010 to notify that the hit type of the hit game is a small hit.

  The prize ball number display area 1013 is a display area for displaying the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game. For example, when one game ball wins in the big winning opening 540 in the small hit game, “+10” indicating the number of the one prize ball is displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013. “+10” displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013 is deleted after a predetermined period has elapsed. When a plurality of game balls are won, "+10" is displayed in the same number as the number of the won game balls.

  The prize ball number display area 1013 includes a plurality of display areas. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number display area 1013 is called a first prize ball number display area 1013a, a second prize ball number display area 1013b, a third prize ball number display area 1013c, and a fourth prize ball number display area 1013d. And four display areas.

  The first prize ball number display area 1013a is provided at the left center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and below the JAC symbol display area 1010. The second prize ball number display area 1013b is provided at the right center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and below the JAC number display area 1004. The third prize ball number display area 1013c is provided in the lower right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16. The fourth award ball number display area 1013d is provided at the upper center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and between the JAC symbol display area 1010 and the JAC number display area 1004.

  Also, in the first prize ball number display area 1013a, the second prize ball number display area 1013b, the third prize ball number display area 1013c, and the fourth prize ball number display area 1013d, a game ball has won a large winning opening 540. “+10” is displayed in order. Specifically, when the game ball first wins after the small hitting game is started, “+10” is displayed in the first prize ball number display area 1013a. When a game ball wins next, “+10” is displayed in the second ball count display area 1013b. When a game ball wins next, “+10” is displayed in the third winning ball count display area 1013c. When a game ball wins next, “+10” is displayed in the fourth prize ball count display area 1013d. When the next game ball wins, the order is returned to the first prize ball number display area 1013a.

  Note that FIG. 110 shows an example of a display in a case where two game balls have won a large winning opening 540 that has been opened after the small hitting game has started. That is, in the example of the display shown in FIG. 110, after the small hitting game is started, “+10” is displayed in the first prize ball number display area 1013a corresponding to the game ball that has won first, and then the winning is performed. “+10” is displayed in the second prize ball number display area 1013b corresponding to the game ball that has been played.

  In the following, a specific effect content of the pending consecutive suggestion effect performed using the award ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described. In addition, the hold consecutive suggestion effect described below means that, when a small hit occurs during the JAC game, if the probability change big hit is described in the hold, the JAC game continues after the big hit ends.

  Describing the specific effect contents, as shown in FIG. 111, the pending consecutive suggestion effect is an effect of changing the color of “+10” displayed in the number-of-prize-balls display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16. Specifically, when the pending consecutive suggestion effect is performed, the color of “+10” displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16 is changed to the normal white (when the pending consecutive suggestion effect is not performed). Unlike, it is gold. In this manner, when the effect of suggesting a pending ream is performed, the player can recognize the presence of the pending ream by visually recognizing the golden “+10” displayed in the number-of-prize-balls display area 1013.

  As described above, when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540 during the small hit game, the number of award balls is displayed in accordance with the winning, and the color of the displayed character is made different from a normal one, so that the hold sequence is performed. Can indicate presence.

  Here, as described above, when there is a hold streak, the hold streak suggestion effect is performed when the jackpot game is finished in the JAC game without shifting to the EX game (non-probable change / time saving state) (probable change / time saving state). (The time saving state is continued.) This is the case where there is a jackpot reserved ball. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if a state in which a reserved series can be performed by executing a predetermined process, a reserved series suggestion effect is not performed unless a predetermined condition is further satisfied. In the present embodiment, the process of determining whether or not to perform the pending consecutive suggestion effect is a process of determining whether or not to display the number of prize balls in the small hit game in the number of prize balls display area 1013 (hereinafter, “small prize balls”). Win game prize ball number display process ").

  Hereinafter, the small hit game award ball number display processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112.

  The small hit game award ball number display processing shown in FIG. 112 is performed in the effect pattern determination processing by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) as described above.

  In step S1471, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a small hit game is being played. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the small hit game is being played, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1472. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the small hit game is not being performed, the small hit game award ball number display processing ends.

  In step S1472, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 540. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has been won in the special winning opening 540, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1473. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that no game ball has been won in the special winning opening 540, the small hit game award ball number display process ends.

  As described above, when the small hit game is not being performed (NO in step S1471) or when no game ball is won in the large winning opening 540 (NO in step S1472), the prize ball is acquired in the small hit game. Therefore, no prize ball (“+10”) is displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Next, in step S1473, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of a specific type (hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3). The big hit with the hit type of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is a big hit with a corresponding symbol of 4R (probable change), 6R (probable change), or 8R (probable change) of Tokujin Figure 2. In other words, the jackpot whose hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is a jackpot in which the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) continues after the jackpot game. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 does not have a specific type of jackpot, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1476. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a specific type of big hit, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1474.

  In step S1474, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of a hit type with a hit type. Note that the hit type of the hit operation is the hit of the 4R (normal) of the special figure 2 in the corresponding symbol. That is, the big hit in which the hit type is the sudden action is a big hit that shifts from the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) to the EX game (non-probable change / time saving state) after the big hit game. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of a hit operation, the process proceeds to step S1476. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the retained ball displayed in the retained ball display area 1200 does not have the hit type of the hit operation, the process proceeds to step S1475.

  In step S1475, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot in the hold has reached the limit. When determining that the limit has been reached, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1476. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has not been reached, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1377.

  In step S1476, the sub CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16, and sets the color of the displayed character (“+10”) to white. That is, in the present small hit game prize ball number display processing, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the hold consecutive suggestion effect.

  As described above, when the process of step S1476 is performed, it means that a small hit is being played (YES in step S1471), and that a game ball has been won in the big winning opening 540 (YES in step S1472). However, the case where the holding ball does not have a big hit in which the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) continues after the big hit game (NO in step S1473) is included. In such a case, since there is no pending run, the pending run is not performed.

  Also, when the process of step S1476 is performed, it means that a small ball is being played (YES in step S1471) or a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 540 (YES in step S1472). This includes a case in which the holding ball has a big hit of a hit type in the hit type (YES in step S1474). In such a case, when the next big hit is performed, the player falls from the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) (that is, a big hit that is relatively disadvantageous to the player is performed, and Do not hold reservations because it will reduce interest).

  Next, in step S1478, the sub CPU 201 displays the number of award balls in the award ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16, and sets the color of the displayed character (“+10”) to gold. That is, in the present small hitting game prize ball number display processing, the sub CPU 201 performs a held consecutive suggestion effect.

As described above, when the process of step S1479 is performed, it means that a small hit game is being played (YES in step S1471), and that a game ball has been won in the big winning port 540 (YES in step S1472). In addition, if there is a big hit in which the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) continues after the big hit game on the reserved ball (YES in step S1473), and if there is no big hit of the hit type in the reserved ball (step S1474). NO), and the case where the current state has not reached the limit and the game is in the JAC game (probable change / time saving state) (NO in step S1475) is included. In such a case, since there is a pending ream and even if the effect of suggesting the reserving ream is performed, the interest of the player is not reduced, so the retaining ream is performed. In this way, when the pending consecutive suggestion effect is performed, the interest of the player can be improved.
When step S1475 is affirmative, the color is always gold, but a lottery may be added thereto. Further, the color may be changed even when there is a small hit in the hold during the small hit. In that case, the color indicating the small hit run may be red instead of gold. In addition, when a lottery is added as described above, when a jackpot is found in the hold, one of white, red, and gold may be determined, and in the case of 4R certainty, a large amount of white is easily determined. In the case of 6R probability change, red is easily determined. In the case of the 8R probability change, a large amount of money may be easily determined.

[Game evaluation process]
Hereinafter, the game evaluation processing in the JAC game will be described.

  First, the game evaluation process in the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG. In the game evaluation process, the game played by the player during the JAC game is evaluated based on a predetermined standard described later. The game evaluation process is performed in the effect control process of step S1104 shown in FIG. The game evaluation process is performed when the limit is reached and when the limit is not reached, when the vehicle falls.

  In step S1501, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a rank point of the game count. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the rank points of the game count based on the game count rank point determination table shown in FIG. Note that the game count (during the JAC game) refers to the total number of variable displays performed from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the probable change. The rank point of the game count refers to a score indicating an evaluation made according to the numerical value of the game count.

  FIG. 114 shows a table defining ranks and rank points related to game counts. In the table shown in FIG. 114, ranks and rank points are defined according to the game count during the JAC game. The rank is classified into four stages (S, A, B, C), and the evaluation is higher in the order of S, A, B, C. Similarly, the rank points are classified into four grades (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the evaluation is higher in the order of larger numbers (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point). Things. The rank and the rank point correspond to each other. For the rank S, four rank points, for the rank A, three rank points, for the rank B, two rank points, and for the rank C, one rank point are given.

  In the rank point determination table of the game count shown in FIG. 114, when the game count is 199 or less, rank S and four points are given. When the game count is 200 to 239, rank A and three points are given. When the game count is 240 to 299, rank B and two rank points are given, and when the game count is 300 or more, rank C and one rank point are given. That is, the table shown in FIG. 114 is defined such that the smaller the game count, the higher the rank and rank points.

  Note that the game count is cleared when the game shifts to the non-probable change / time saving state (that is, when the game reaches the limit or falls due to the big hit of 8R (normal) in FIG. 2). The larger the game count is, the lower the evaluation is. Therefore, unlike the JAC number described later, the count is started from 0 even when the game is pulled back in the EX game. In this case, since the number of games is small and the number of JACs is likely to be large, the rank is likely to be high at the time of withdrawal, so that it is possible to improve the interest in returning to the player.

The game count in the case where the player falls down halfway and the limit is not reached is simulated by a numerical value calculated based on the following formula.
｛(Game count when falling) / (number of big hits)｝ × 10

  In other words, if the player falls down on the way and the limit has not been reached, the average value of the game count required to fall for one big hit is calculated. Simulate the game count upon arrival. Note that the number of big hits in the above calculation formula does not include the big hits that have fallen.

For example, if the game count at the time of falling is 100 and the number of big hits is 4, the game count is simulated as (100/4) × 10 = 250. Then, by applying the simulated game count 250 to the table of FIG. 114, rank B and two rank points are given. In other words, if the game count 100 at the time of falling is applied to the table of FIG. 114 as it is, rank S and four rank points will be given. However, the game count at the time of falling is naturally smaller than that at the time of reaching the limiter. Therefore, the rank and the rank points are corrected by using the game count simulated as described above so as not to be unduly evaluated at the time of falling.
Note that the game evaluation result is also displayed during the JAC game, for example, when the 4R (normal) of the special map 2 is won or when the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the probable design (specific area easy-to-pass design). . In the present embodiment, since 4R (normal) of the special map 2 is a bumping operation and the big hit period is short, the game evaluation result may be displayed from the middle of the big hit.

  Upon ending this processing, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1502.

  In step S1502, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a rank point of the number of JACs. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 determines the rank points of the number of JACs based on the rank point determination table of the number of JACs shown in FIG. In addition, the number of JACs refers to the number of times the big winning opening 540 is opened in the big hit game and the small hit game after the start of the current JAC game and before the end of the probability change. Also, the rank point of the JAC number refers to a point indicating an evaluation made according to the numerical value of the JAC number.

  FIG. 115 shows a table defining ranks and rank points related to the number of JACs. In the table shown in FIG. 115, ranks and rank points are defined according to the number of JACs. The rank is classified into four stages (S, A, B, C), and the evaluation is higher in the order of S, A, B, C. Similarly, the rank points are classified into four grades (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the evaluation is higher in the order of larger numbers (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point). Things. The rank and the rank point correspond to each other. For the rank S, four rank points, for the rank A, three rank points, for the rank B, two rank points, and for the rank C, one rank point are given.

  In the table shown in FIG. 115, when the number of JACs is 80 or more, rank S and four points of rank points are given. When the number of JACs is 70 to 79, rank A and three points of rank points are given. In the case of 60 to 69, rank B and two rank points are given, and when the number of JAC is 59 or less, rank C and one rank point are given. That is, the table shown in FIG. 115 is defined such that the higher the number of JACs, the higher the rank and rank points.

  The JAC number is cleared when the state shifts to the non-probable variable / time saving state (that is, when the limit is reached or when the vehicle falls down due to the big hit of 8R (normal) in FIG. If there is a big hit (pull-back) in, the counting is continued based on the JAC number at the time of clearing.

  Upon ending this processing, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1503.

  In step S1503, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a rank point of the number of acquired balls during the JAC game. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 determines the rank points of the acquired payout number in the JAC game based on the acquired payout number rank point determination table shown in FIG. Note that the acquired number of balls (during the JAC game) refers to the number of acquired balls from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the probability change. Also, the rank points of the number of acquired payouts refer to points indicating evaluations made according to the numerical value of the number of acquired payouts.

  FIG. 116 shows a table that defines ranks and rank points related to the number of balls to be obtained during the JAC game. In the table shown in FIG. 116, ranks and rank points are defined according to the number of obtained payouts during the JAC game. The rank is classified into four stages (S, A, B, C), and the evaluation is higher in the order of S, A, B, C. Similarly, the rank points are classified into four grades (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the evaluation is higher in the order of larger numbers (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point). Things. The rank and the rank point correspond to each other. For the rank S, four rank points, for the rank A, three rank points, for the rank B, two rank points, and for the rank C, one rank point are given.

  In the table shown in FIG. 116, when the number of acquired balls in the JAC game is 5600 or more, rank S and four rank points are given. When the number of acquired balls in the JAC game is 5000 to 5599, rank A is given. If 3 points are awarded and the number of acquired balls in the JAC game is 4200 to 4999, rank B and 2 points are awarded. If the number of acquired balls in the JAC game is 4199 or less, the rank is given. C, one rank point is given. In other words, the table shown in FIG. 116 is defined such that the higher the number of balls to be obtained during the JAC game, the higher the rank and rank points.

  Note that the acquired payout number is cleared when the state shifts to the non-probable change / time saving state (that is, when the limit is reached, or when the ball falls due to a big hit of 8R (normal) in Tokujin Figure 2). If a big hit (pull-back) occurs in the non-probable change / time saving state, the counting is continued based on the acquired payout at the time of clearing, and the counting of the total acquired payout number is also continued.

  Upon ending this processing, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1504.

  In step S1504, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the overall rank. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the overall rank based on the overall rank determination table shown in FIG.

  The overall rank refers to a rank that comprehensively evaluates the rank points of the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of obtained balls. The sub CPU 201 calculates the total rank point by adding up the rank point of the game count, the rank point of the number of JACs, and the rank point of the number of obtained balls determined in steps S1501 to S1503. Then, as shown in FIG. 117, the overall rank is determined according to the calculated total rank points.

  In the table shown in FIG. 117, when the total rank point is 3 to 4 points, the total rank C is given, and when the total rank point is 5 to 8 points, the total rank B is given, and the total rank point is 9 to 9 points. In the case of 10 points, the overall rank A is given, and in the case of a total of 11 to 12 points, the overall rank S is given.

  For example, assuming that the game count from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the probable change is 224, the number of JACs is 82, and the number of obtained balls is 5615, the rank points related to the game count are 3 points (see FIG. 114). Since the number of rank points related to the number of JACs is 4 (see FIG. 115) and the number of ranks related to the number of acquired balls is 4 (see FIG. 116), the total rank point is 11 and the overall rank is S (see FIG. 115). 117).

  When this processing is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the game evaluation processing routine.

  In the display control process of step S1105 shown in FIG. 21, the sub CPU 201 performs a control process of displaying the game evaluation result calculated by the game evaluation process shown in FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display a game evaluation result display screen including the game count, the number of JACs and the number of acquired payouts, and the total rank determined in step S1504 at the end of the probability change. On the game evaluation result display screen, the total acquired payout number acquired from entering the time reduction state to exiting the time reduction state is also displayed.

  The sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display a game evaluation result display screen as shown in FIG. 118, for example. On the game evaluation result display screen of FIG. 118, it is displayed that the game count is 224, the number of JAC is 82, the acquired number of balls is 5,615, the overall rank S, and the total number of acquired balls is 44444.

  Note that the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display a game evaluation result display screen at that time even if the vehicle falls.

  As described above, the rank (total rank) in which various items related to the game such as the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of acquired balls in the JAC game are comprehensively reflected to the player, so that the player can perform the JAC game. Can be improved.

  The overall rank is calculated such that the higher the game count in the JAC game, the lower the evaluation, and the higher the number of JACs and the number of obtained balls in the JAC game, the higher the evaluation. Therefore, the larger the value of the number of JACs and the number of obtained balls for one game count (variable display), the higher the overall rank. For this reason, when the number of JACs is large despite a small game count (variable display), or when a large number of acquired payouts is obtained despite a small game count (variable display), the overall rank is highly evaluated. . In this way, by incorporating not only the positive evaluation (the number of JACs and the number of obtained balls) but also the negative evaluation (the game count) into the evaluation, the efficiency of the game can be evaluated. Can be improved.

[Detect fraud]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a magnetic sensor (not shown) capable of detecting illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor is provided to detect fraudulent acts using magnets (so-called goto acts). The magnetic sensor is configured to transmit, to the main control circuit 100, a magnetic detection signal indicating that illegal magnetism has been detected when the amount of change in the magnetic field strength from the initial state is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. ing.

[Initialization processing of magnetic sensor]
The magnetic sensor executes an initialization process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. In the initialization process, the magnetic sensor sets a reference value serving as a reference for determining whether or not an illegal magnetism has been detected.

  This will be specifically described below. The magnetic sensor is provided with an initialization terminal to which a signal (magnetic sensor initialization signal) from the main CPU 101 can be input. When the input to the initialization terminal is turned on for one second (when the magnetic sensor initialization signal from the main CPU 101 is input for one second), the magnetic sensor stores the peripheral magnetic field of the magnetic sensor at that time as an initial state, The detected value in the initial state is set as an initial value.

  Then, the magnetic sensor sets, as the reference value, a value obtained by adding a predetermined value corresponding to the amount of change in the magnetic field when the misconduct is performed to the set initial value. Therefore, when the initial value is large, the reference value is also set to a large value.

[Fraud detection processing]
Next, the fraud detection processing will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud detection process shown in FIG. 120 is performed in step S7001 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 120, in step S1511, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the magnetic sensor has detected improper magnetism. In this process, when the main CPU 101 receives the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor (that is, when the detection value of the magnetic sensor is equal to or more than the reference value), the main CPU 101 determines that the illegal magnetism has been detected.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the magnetic sensor has detected an illegal magnetism, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1512. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the magnetic sensor has not detected illegal magnetism, the main CPU 101 ends the fraud detection processing routine.

  In step S1512, the main CPU 101 turns on the error state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning on an error state flag stored in the main RAM 103. If the error state flag is already on, it remains on. Upon ending this processing, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1513.

  In step S1513, the main CPU 101 performs a notification setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the notification setting command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and transmits the notification setting command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the fraud detection process routine ends.

  By the notification setting process in step S1513, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal indicating that an illegal magnetism has been detected to the outside of the gaming machine such as a hall computer via the external terminal board 320. Therefore, the clerk can recognize that fact.

[Main CPU activation process]
Next, the main CPU activation process will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU activation process shown in FIG. 121 is performed in the initialization process of step S10 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 121, in step S1521, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been turned on. In this process, the main CPU 101 makes this determination based on whether or not a power ON signal has been received from a power supply board connected to a power switch. When determining that the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1522. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power is not turned on, the main CPU activation processing routine ends.

  The power switch is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a position where the door can be opened / closed by opening the door. When the power switch is turned on, a power ON signal is output to the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201, and the payout / emission control circuit 300 from a power board connected to the power switch.

  In step S1522, the main CPU 101 determines whether the wait timer has elapsed. The wait timer of the main CPU 101 is set to a time sufficient to close the door. In the present embodiment, the wait timer of the main CPU 101 is set to 10 seconds. When determining that the wait timer has elapsed, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1523. On the other hand, when determining that the wait timer has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU activation processing routine.

  As a result, the main CPU 101 enters a standby state (performs a start-up wait) without performing a process described later during a preset wait timer (10 seconds).

  In step S1523, the main CPU 101 performs a magnetic sensor initialization signal ON process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal for instructing the magnetic sensor to perform an initialization process (which triggers the magnetic sensor to perform the initialization process) to the magnetic sensor initialization terminal for one second. . Upon ending this processing, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1524.

  In step S1524, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at startup. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1525. Note that the movable piece 7220 that is driven at a constant period in the game ball distribution device 7200 described above is managed by the main CPU 101, and after the initialization is executed in this step, the operation is started.

  In step S1525, the main CPU 101 performs a process of shifting to a playable state. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU activation processing routine.

[Payout / Launch Control Circuit Activation Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the payout / firing control circuit activation process will be described. The dispensing / firing control circuit activation process shown in FIG. 122 is performed in the initialization process of the dispensing / firing control circuit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in step S1531, the payout / firing control circuit 300 determines whether the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In this processing, the payout / firing control circuit 300 makes this determination based on whether or not a power ON signal has been received from a power board connected to the power switch. When determining that the power is turned on, the payout / firing control circuit 300 shifts the processing to step S1532. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not turned on, the payout / fire control circuit 300 ends the payout / fire control circuit activation processing routine.

  In step S1532, the payout / firing control circuit 300 determines whether the wait timer has elapsed. The wait timer of the dispensing / firing control circuit 300 is set to a time longer than the total time of the wait timer (10 seconds) of the main CPU 101 and the output time (1 second) of the magnetic sensor initialization signal. In the present embodiment, the wait timer of the payout / firing control circuit 300 is set to 12 seconds. If the payout / firing control circuit 300 determines that the wait timer has elapsed, the payout / firing control circuit 300 moves the process to step S1533. On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait timer has not elapsed, the payout / fire control circuit 300 ends the payout / fire control circuit activation processing routine.

  As a result, the payout / firing control circuit 300 enters a standby state (performs a start-up wait) without performing a process described later for a preset wait timer (12 seconds).

  In step S1533, the payout / firing control circuit 300 performs an initialization process at the time of startup. In this process, the payout / firing control circuit 300 sets the driving member of the payout device 340 (such as a motor for performing an operation of paying out game balls) to the initial position. When this process ends, the payout / firing control circuit 300 moves the process to step S1534.

  In step S1534, the payout / firing control circuit 300 performs a transition process to a game possible state. When this process ends, the payout / fire control circuit 300 ends the payout / fire control circuit activation processing routine.

[Sub CPU activation process]
Next, the sub CPU activation process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub CPU activation process shown in FIG. 123 is performed in the initialization process of step S1101 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 123, in step S1541, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been turned on. In this process, the sub CPU 201 makes this determination based on whether or not a power ON signal has been received from the power supply board connected to the power switch. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the power has been turned on, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1542. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the power is not turned on, the sub CPU activation processing routine ends.

  In step S1542, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the wait timer has elapsed. The wait timer of the sub CPU 201 is set to a time longer than the total time of the wait timer (10 seconds) of the main CPU 101 and the output time (1 second) of the magnetic sensor initialization signal. In the present embodiment, the wait timer of the sub CPU 201 is set to 12 seconds. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the wait timer has elapsed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1543. On the other hand, when determining that the wait timer has not elapsed, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU activation processing routine.

  As a result, the sub CPU 201 enters a standby state (performs a start wait) without performing a process described later during a preset wait timer (12 seconds).

  In step S1543, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization process at the time of startup. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 performs a driving operation with the driving members such as the first movable auditors unit (producing device 2400), the second movable auditors unit 82, and the third movable auditors unit 83 as operation confirmation. Then, the initial position is set by returning to the initial position. Note that a sensor for position detection is provided at the initial position, and each movable accessory unit is provided with a detected portion corresponding to the sensor for detection, so that it is possible to detect the return to the initial position. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1544.

  In step S1544, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to a playable state. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU activation processing routine.

  Next, the timing of the initialization processing by the magnetic sensor will be described with reference to FIG. 124, while comparing the timing of the initialization processing of the payout / emission control circuit 300 and the sub CPU 201.

  When the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal (see step S1523 in FIG. 121) for one second after a startup wait for 10 seconds. When the magnetic sensor initialization signal output from the main CPU 101 is turned on for one second, the magnetic sensor stores the peripheral magnetic field at that time as an initial state, and sets a detected value in the initial state as an initial value.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 and the payout / firing control circuit 300 perform an initialization process after a 12-second activation wait. That is, the sub CPU 201 and the payout / firing control circuit 300 perform an initialization process after the initialization of the magnetic sensor.

  Here, assuming that the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor is performed during the initialization of the sub CPU 201 and the dispensing / emission control circuit 300, the initialization of the sub CPU 201 and the ejection / emission control circuit 300 is performed during the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor. Depending on the setting (setting of the driving member to the initial position), the peripheral magnetic field of the magnetic sensor may increase. If the initial value of the magnetic sensor is set to a relatively large value by detecting the peripheral magnetic field, the reference value of the magnetic sensor also becomes a relatively large value accordingly. Then, even in a situation in which there is a fraudulent act using a magnet and it should be determined that the fraudulent magnetism was originally detected, a situation may occur in which the fraudulent magnetism cannot be detected because it is determined to be below the reference value. In addition, the magnetic sensor is installed so as to mainly detect the lower periphery of the game board such as the starting port, and is not normally generated by the driving means or the like when the driving member is moving from above or the like to the lower side of the game board. A magnetic field may be generated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the initialization processing of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / firing control circuit 300 is executed at a timing that does not overlap with the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor, and the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor is performed. Wait and be done. In other words, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initialization process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300. Therefore, the magnetic sensor is used for the first movable auditors unit (producing device 2400), the second movable auditors unit 82, the third movable auditors unit 83, and other driving members of the payout device 340 (games). In a state where all driving systems such as a motor for performing an operation of dispensing a ball) are stopped, the peripheral magnetic field at that time is stored as an initial state, and a detected value of the initial state is set as an initial value. .

  Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving the driving member. For this reason, it is prevented that the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value are set to be unduly high. Therefore, appropriate fraud detection can be performed.

Further, the wait timer (10 seconds) of the main CPU 101 is such that the outer frame and the main body are opened in the case of a pachinko game machine, and the case and the front door are opened in the case of a pachislot game machine. For example, when the time is set to a time sufficient to close the door or the like, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed with the door closed (it is considered). Therefore, the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the original usage state, so that appropriate fraud detection can be performed.
Note that the initialization process may be performed during the period of the wait timer as long as the timing does not overlap the initialization process of the magnetic sensor.

[Main CPU activation process according to second embodiment]
Next, a main CPU activation process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the main CPU activation processing shown in FIG. 125, the processing from steps S1551 to S1554 is the same as the processing from steps S1521 to S1524 shown in FIG.

  In step S1555, the main CPU 101 transmits a start command to the sub CPU 201 and the payout / firing control circuit 300. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1556.

  In step S1556, the main CPU 101 performs a process of shifting to a playable state. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU activation processing routine according to the second embodiment.

[Payout / Launch Control Circuit Activation Process According to Second Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a payout / firing control circuit activation process according to the second embodiment will be described.

  In the payout / firing control circuit activation processing shown in FIG. 126, the processing in step S1561 is the same as the processing in step S1531 shown in FIG.

  In step S1562, the payout / firing control circuit 300 determines whether a start command from the main CPU 101 has been received. When determining that the start-up command has been received, the payout / ejection control circuit 300 shifts the processing to step S1563. On the other hand, when determining that the start-up command has not been received, the payout / fire control circuit 300 ends the payout / fire control circuit start processing routine according to the second embodiment.

  In step S1563, the payout / firing control circuit 300 performs an initialization process at startup. When this process ends, the payout / firing control circuit 300 moves the process to step S1564.

  In step S1564, the payout / firing control circuit 300 performs a process of shifting to a playable state. When this process ends, the payout / fire control circuit 300 ends the payout / fire control circuit activation processing routine according to the second embodiment.

[Sub CPU activation process according to second embodiment]
Next, a sub CPU activation process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the sub CPU activation processing shown in FIG. 127, the processing in step S1571 is the same as the processing in step S1541 shown in FIG.

  In step S1572, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a start command has been received from the main CPU 101. When determining that the activation command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1573. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the activation command has not been received, the sub CPU activation processing routine according to the second embodiment ends.

  In step S1573, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization process at the time of startup. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1574.

  In step S1574, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to a playable state. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU activation processing routine.

  As described above, also in the second embodiment, the initialization processing of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300 is performed after the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor. In other words, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initialization process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value from being set to an unreasonably high value. Therefore, appropriate fraud detection can be performed.

[Direction processing based on specific winnings]
Next, a description will be given of a specific winning effect that is performed in a normal state.

  The special winning effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 when a game ball wins at a predetermined starting port. The special prize production is normally displayed (non-probable change / non-time saving state). In this embodiment, the predetermined starting port is, for example, of the two first starting ports (starting port 7072b and starting port 7071a) of the starting port unit 7070 shown in FIG. Point to.

  In addition, as described above, at the two first starting ports, the player who wins the base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b (when the vehicle passes the advantageous course) wins the starting port 7071a (when the vehicle passes the disadvantageous course). It is set so that more prize balls can be obtained. In this way, when a game ball wins on the baseboard-side advantageous forward path 7072b, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 to notify the player that many prize balls have been obtained. Can be. In the following, the winning of the game ball on the baseboard side advantageous forward path 7072b may be referred to as "specific winning".

  Hereinafter, an example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a specific winning effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 128.

  As shown in FIG. 128, in the normal game (non-probable change / non-time saving state), the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a display area 1021 for symbol change and a display area 1022 for a specific winning effect.

  The symbol variation display area 1021 is a display area in which three identification symbols are varied and displayed. The symbol change display area 1021 is provided so as to substantially occupy the upper half of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16. Thus, the symbol change display area 1021 is set so that the player can visually recognize the change display of the three identification symbols.

  The special winning effect display area 1022 is provided at the lower center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the example shown in FIG. 128, the character “GOOD” is displayed in the specific winning effect display area 1022 due to the specific winning effect (the specific winning effect is being performed). The character “GOOD” of the special winning effect is deleted after a predetermined period has elapsed.

  Even if there is a specific prize, the specific prize effect is not performed when a predetermined reach effect is being performed. In the present embodiment, for example, a blackout reach effect (not shown) is given as the predetermined condition. The darkening reach effect is a reach effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened, similarly to the first effect in the first look-ahead effect as described above. In such a reach effect, if the character "GOOD" is displayed, the effect in the darkened state will be hindered. Therefore, in such a case, the specific winning effect is not performed.

  Hereinafter, the specific winning effect determination processing for determining whether to perform the specific winning effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The specific winning effect determination processing shown in FIG. 129 is performed in the effect pattern determination processing (see FIG. 94A) by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) as described above.

  In step S1581, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is a normal game (non-probable change / non-time saving state). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is a normal game (non-probable change / non-time saving state), the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1582. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is not a normal game (non-probable change / non-time saving state), the specific winning effect determination processing ends.

  In step S1582, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a specific prize (winning of a game ball to the baseboard-side advantageous forward path 7072b). If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a specific winning, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1583. On the other hand, when determining that there is no specific winning, the sub CPU 201 ends the specific winning effect determining process.

  In step S1583, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a blackout reach effect is being produced. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the dark reach reach is not being performed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1584. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the dark reach reach effect is being performed, the specific winning effect determination process ends. That is, in this case, the specific winning effect is not performed even though the specific winning has occurred.

  In step S1584, the sub CPU 201 determines to perform a specific winning effect. Thus, the specific winning effect is performed, and the character “GOOD” is displayed in the specific winning effect display area 1022 of the liquid crystal display device 16. After this processing, the sub CPU 201 ends the specific winning effect determination processing.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined reach effect, a dark turn reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[Always look ahead for fluctuation patterns in a specific state]

  Next, the prefetching of the fluctuation pattern in a specific state at all times will be described.

  In the prior art, a big hit, a small hit, and a loss determination (the big hit is determined during the special figure high probability and the special figure low probability, respectively), At the time, the hit symbol is judged (implemented for the one that hits big or small in any state regardless of the high probability or low probability), and the fluctuation pattern is judged (the above two (Implemented based on the determination result). Generally, these pre-read determinations are made in the state of the hold winning prize. There is also a machine.

  When it is desired to perform a look-ahead determination as to what kind of variation is selected under specific conditions (for example, a variation pattern selection state in which only four rotations after a big hit) when the retained ball actually varies. If the main control circuit 100 makes a determination in consideration of the number of fluctuations until the reserved ball is consumed, the order of digestion, the transition of the game state due to the big hit in the reserve, etc., the program capacity required for the determination increases. There are points. Therefore, the determination in the main control circuit 100 is made a simple program so that the sub-control circuit 200 can determine whether to use the determination result of the main control circuit 100.

  Specifically, the following method is adopted.

  In the main control circuit 100, in addition to the normal pre-reading determination, a lottery to be performed under specific conditions is performed irrespective of whether there is a possibility of actually shifting to that state. That is, in addition to performing the determination of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss, and the hit pattern at the time of the hit, the determination of the variation pattern, and the determination of the variation pattern under specific conditions are performed. Note that, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the condition that is the specific condition is limited to “four revolutions immediately after the end of the big hit when the probability is changing after the big hit”. In the “determination of small hit and loss”, only in the case of “big hit during high probability”, the variation pattern is determined as a big hit, and in other cases, the variation pattern is determined as a loss.

  Further, the sub-control circuit 200 uses the fluctuation pattern information of four rotations immediately after the end of the big hit in the case where the big change is made after the big hit only in a predetermined state (here, only at the start of the big hit during the changing). In other states, the sub-control circuit 200 uses the fluctuation pattern information of the normal pre-reading determination. In addition, at the time of the big hit during normal times, there is no lottery to determine whether or not to hold the continuous production.

  In addition, the reservation of the special map 2 is checked in order from the previous reservation, and from each reservation, a fluctuation pattern in “4 rotations immediately after the end of the big hit when the probability is changing after the big hit” is acquired, and based on the fluctuation pattern information, A lottery table for determining whether or not to perform the pending consecutive production is determined. In addition, in the jackpot during the probability change, it is also used to judge whether or not there is a specific loss variation pattern in determining whether or not to perform an effect indicating a pending ream in the effect during the jackpot. In addition, the reservation of the special map 2 is checked in order from the previous reservation, and from each reservation, a fluctuation pattern in “4 rotations immediately after the end of the big hit when the probability is changing after the big hit” is acquired, and based on the fluctuation pattern information, It is determined whether or not a specific loss variation pattern is before the big hit variation, and it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous production.

  The outline of the present invention is listed below based on the above embodiments.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine that changes the length of time of an ending effect performed when a big hit game ends is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-198776).

  The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that changes the length of the ending effect time according to the winning situation of a game ball in a specific area during a big hit game.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a problem that the time management of the effect becomes complicated because the time of the ending effect differs depending on the game situation.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating time management of an effect.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the gaming board 17 having the game area 20 in which the game balls can roll, the first position where the game balls are easy to win, and the second position where the game balls are hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) having a shutter 610 (displacement member) capable of being displaced to a position, first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which game balls can pass in the game area 20, The main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) capable of storing start information based on the game balls passing through the first and second start ports (pass areas), and the shutter 610 based on a determination result based on the start information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game for displacing the (displacement member) to the first position; and a main control circuit capable of executing a specific game advantageous to a player after the end of the hit game. Control circuit 100 (specific game control means A liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information, a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of variably displaying the identification information and then displaying a stop. A sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling the effect, wherein the hitting game is performed by moving the shutter 610 (displacement member) from the second position after the start of the hitting game. The main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) has a round game for displacing to the first position, and the main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) performs the big hit game (hit game) after a predetermined end interval period elapses after the round game ends. ), The main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) can variably display the identification information based on the start information after the big hit game (hit game) ends. The sub-control circuit 200 (production control means) is configured to execute the big hit game (hit game) in the end interval period when the probability change game (specific game) is executed after the big hit game (hit game) ends. ) End effect, and after the big hit game (hit game) ends, an effect relating to the certainty change game (specific game) is started, and the big hit game (after the hit game ends, the certainty change game (specific game) is executed) If not, the ED effect (end effect) of the big hit game (hit game) extends from at least a part of the change display of the first identification information after the end of the big hit game (hit game) from the end interval period). It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a configuration, the time management of the effect can be facilitated.

  Specifically, when the limit is reached, the ED effect is not ended at the timing when the big hit game ends (timing when the end interval period ends), but is continued until the middle of the next first variation. Thus, for example, even when all the end interval periods set by the sub CPU 201 are set to be the same, the ED effect is performed in a short period when the limit is not reached, and the ED effect is performed when the limit is reached (result display). Effects and EX game transition effects) can be performed for a long period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which gaming balls can roll, a first position where gaming balls are easy to win, and a second position where gaming balls are hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member); first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which game balls can pass in the game area 20; A main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) capable of storing start information based on a game ball passing through a second start port (pass area), and the shutter 610 (displacement) based on a determination result based on the start information. Main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game for displacing the member) to the first position, and a main control circuit capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player after the end of the hit game. 100 (specific game control means), A liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined on the basis of the start-up information, a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stopping and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information; A sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling the hitting game, wherein after the start of the hitting game, the shutter 610 (displacement member) is moved from the second position to the second position. The main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) has a round game in which the big hit game (hit game) is displaced to a position 1 after a predetermined end interval period has elapsed since the round game ended. The main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) can variably display the identification information based on the start information after the big hit game (hit game) ends. The sub-control circuit 200 (production control means), when the probability change game (specific game) is executed after the big hit game (hit game) ends, the big hit game (hit game) in the end interval period An ED effect (end effect) is executed, and after the big hit game (hit game) ends, an effect related to the certainty change game (specific game) is started, and after the big hit game (hit game) ends, the certainty change game (specific game) ends. ) Is not executed, the ED effect (end effect) of the big hit game (hit game) extends from the end interval period to at least a part of a period of change display of the first identification information after the big hit game (hit game) ends. ),
The period (10 seconds in the present embodiment) from the start of the change of the first identification information after the end of the big hit game (hit game) to the end of the ED effect (end effect) of the big hit game (hit game) is as follows: It is characterized in that it is longer than the end interval period (5 seconds in this embodiment).

  According to such a configuration, the time management of the effect can be facilitated.

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the EX game transition effect is performed (from the start of the change of the first identification information after the end of the big hit game to the end of the ED effect of the big hit game) is longer than the end interval period for performing the result display effect. Since the period is longer, the effect of notifying that the EX game is to be started next can be made relatively various. In this way, the player's interest can be improved despite the fact that the gaming state shifts from the probable change / time reduction state to the non-probability change / time reduction state.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which gaming balls can roll, a first position where gaming balls are easy to win, and a second position where gaming balls are hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member); first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which game balls can pass in the game area 20; A main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) capable of storing start information based on a game ball passing through a second start port (pass area), and the shutter 610 (displacement) based on a determination result based on the start information. Main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game for displacing the member) to the first position, and a main control circuit capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player after the end of the hit game. 100 (specific game control means), A liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined on the basis of the start-up information, a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stopping and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information; And a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling, wherein the specific game is selected from among the games that can be selected as the specific game by the main control circuit 100 (hit game determination means). The hit game has a probable change game in which the determination as to whether or not to generate the hit game can be executed with a higher probability than the normal game, and the hit game starts the hit game and moves the shutter 610 (displacement member) to the second position. The main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) has a round game for displacing from the second position to the first position, and a predetermined end interval period has elapsed since the round game ended. After the big hit game (hit game) ends, the main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) changes the identification information based on the start information after the big hit game (hit game) ends. Can be displayed, and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) can execute the big hit game (special game) after the big hit game (hit game) is completed after the big hit game (hit game) is completed. The end effect of the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game (hit game) ends, an effect related to the certain hit game (specific game) is started, and after the big hit game (hit game) ends, the positive change game (specific game) is ended. ) Is not executed, at least a part of the fluctuation display of the first identification information after the end of the big hit game (hit game) from the end interval period. During the period, the ED effect (end effect) of the big hit game (hit game) is executed, and the change display of the first identification information is changed from the normal game before the big hit game (hit game) is executed. The game is performed in a predetermined mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, the time management of the effect can be facilitated.

  In other words, the player who has the impression that the big hit game is still continuing (that is, the fluctuation display of the next first fluctuation has not been started) is visually uncomfortable. Can be prevented. That is, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of reaching the limit, the ED effect is not ended at the timing when the big hit game ends, but is continued until the middle of the next first variation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. Specifically, at the time of reaching the limit, the ED effect may be ended at the timing when the fluctuation display of the next first variation ends, or may be continued until the second variation or later.

  The outline of the present invention is listed below based on the above embodiments.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a technology of a gaming machine that performs a continuous holding suggestion effect that suggests that a jackpot is included in a hold during a performance of a jackpot game (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-15093).

  The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that performs a holding consecutive suggestion effect that indicates that a jackpot is included in a hold as a jackpot effect during a jackpot round game.

  However, the conventional gaming machines described above have a problem that they lack the interest of the game because the timings of indicating the pending reams are the same.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the gaming board 17 having the game area 20 in which the game balls can roll, the first position where the game balls are easy to win, and the second position where the game balls are hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) having a shutter 610 (displacement member) capable of being displaced to a position, first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which game balls can pass in the game area 20, The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game balls passing through the first and second starting ports (passing areas) and the main control circuit 100 according to a determination result based on the starting information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which a shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced to the first position; and a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information. 16 (image display means) A main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stopping and displaying after variably displaying the identification information, a sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determination means) capable of determining the content of the effect to be executed based on the start information, A sub-control circuit 200 (production control means) capable of executing production control based on the production content determined by the sub-control circuit 200 (production content determination means), wherein the sub-control circuit 200 (Effect control means) executes control for displaying a holding ball (start information image) based on the start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) on the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). It is possible that the sub-control circuit 200 (effect information determining means) displays the holding ball (start information image) when the start information is specific start information. It is possible to determine that the first effect (the first specific effect) is to be executed during a period after the setting and before the variable display based on the specific start information is started. The second effect (second specific effect) is executed based on the start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) in association with the execution of the variable display of the identification information based on the second effect. The sub-control circuit 200 (production control means) can execute the second production (second specific production) after executing the first production (first specific production). It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, a darkened screen is displayed when the first effect ends, and an effect (EF) is displayed on the darkened screen when the second effect starts. ) Is displayed. As described above, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. In this way, the first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second effect of causing a predetermined character to appear and appear on the screen darkened by the first effect by using an effect are combined to form the first effect. It is possible to suggest a pending rendezvous without causing a sense of incongruity in the connection between the effect and the second effect. In this way, without causing a sense of incongruity to the player, the effect of the combination of black and high-gloss light particles (that is, the first effect in which the effect content of the second effect is shown) By performing related effects), the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, the specific start information is start information determined to be the hit game, and the second effect (second specific effect) is a specific effect for executing the first effect (first specific effect). This is executed during the fluctuation display of the identification information based on the start information.

  According to such a configuration, when the second effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current situation is displaying the change of the identification information based on the specific start information for executing the first effect. Can be. In this way, interest can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which gaming balls can roll, a first position where gaming balls are easy to win, and a second position where gaming balls are hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member); first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which game balls can pass in the game area 20; A main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) capable of storing start information based on a game ball passing through a second start port (pass area), and the shutter 610 (displacement) based on a determination result based on the start information. The main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game for displacing the member) to the first position, and the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information. Means) and the identification information The main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of variably displaying and displaying a stop, a sub control circuit 200 (effect content determination means) capable of determining the content of the effect to be executed based on the start information, A sub-control circuit 200 (production control means) capable of executing production control based on the production content determined by the control circuit 200 (production content determination means), wherein the sub-control circuit 200 (production The control means) can execute a control for displaying a holding ball (start information image) based on the start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) on the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). When the start information is the first specific start information, the sub control circuit 200 (the effect contents determining means) determines that the holding ball (start information image) is to be displayed. It is possible to determine that the first effect (the first specific effect) is to be executed during a period after the time until the variable display based on the first specific start information is started, and In connection with the execution of the variation display of the identification information based on the content of the effect, the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) stores the second specific start information (big hit) according to whether or not it is stored. Can be determined to execute a second effect (second specific effect) that can change the first effect (the first effect) to the specific effect. After performing the effect, the second effect (second specific effect) can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a darkened screen is displayed when the first effect ends, and an effect (EF) is displayed on the darkened screen when the second effect starts. ) Is displayed. As described above, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. In this way, the first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second effect of causing a predetermined character to appear and appear on the screen darkened by the first effect by using an effect are combined to form the first effect. It is possible to suggest a pending rendezvous without causing a sense of incongruity in the connection between the effect and the second effect. In this way, without causing a sense of incongruity to the player, the effect of the combination of black and high-gloss light particles (that is, the first effect in which the effect content of the second effect is shown) By performing related effects), the interest of the player can be improved.
In the second effect, the effect content is changed depending on whether or not the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a big hit. Specifically, when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a big hit, an appearance effect is performed, and when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a loss, a gassing effect is performed. As described above, since various effects can be performed, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, the first specific start information is start information determined to be the hit game, and the second effect (second specific effect) is a first effect that executes the first effect (first specific effect). 1 This is executed during the fluctuation display of the identification information based on the specific start information.

  According to such a configuration, when the second effect is executed, the player is made to recognize that the current situation is the variable display of the identification information based on the first specific start information for executing the first effect. be able to. In this way, interest can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which gaming balls can roll, a first position where gaming balls are easy to win, and a second position where gaming balls are hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member); first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which game balls can pass in the game area 20; A main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) capable of storing start information based on a game ball passing through a second start port (pass area), and the shutter 610 (displacement) based on a determination result based on the start information. Main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game for displacing the member) to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 (image display) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information. Means) and the identification information The main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of variably displaying and displaying a stop, a sub control circuit 200 (effect content determination means) capable of determining the content of the effect to be executed based on the start information, A sub-control circuit 200 (production control means) capable of executing production control based on the production content determined by the control circuit 200 (production content determination means), wherein the sub-control circuit 200 (production The control means) can execute a control for displaying a holding ball (start information image) based on the start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) on the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). When the start information is the first specific start information, the sub control circuit 200 (the effect contents determining means) determines that the holding ball (start information image) is to be displayed. 1st effect (first specific effect) executed during a period from the time before the change display based on the first specific start information is started, and the change of the identification information based on the first specific start information. It is possible to determine that a second effect (a second specific effect) to be performed during the display is to be performed, and in connection with the variable display of the identification information being performed based on the first specific start information, When the second specific start information (big hit) is stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) and a predetermined condition is satisfied (see FIG. 104), the second effect (the second specific It is possible to execute an effect change process of changing the effect contents of the effect (into a gaseous effect or an appearance effect), and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) executes the first effect (first specific effect). After that, the second performance (second (Specific effect) can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the content of the second effect is changed according to whether or not the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a big hit. Specifically, when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a big hit, an appearance effect is performed, and when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a loss, a gassing effect is performed. Furthermore, even if the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a big hit, for example, if the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of the hit type The effect contents of the second effect are not changed from the gaseous effect to the appearance effect. As described above, since various effects can be performed, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Note that the mutual relevance between the first effect and the second effect is not limited to the one according to the present embodiment (the relevance between the second effect and the first effect that shows the effect contents of the second effect). . For example, a part of the effect image displayed in the first effect may be displayed in the second effect, and even if the effect images are completely different, the effect images displayed in the first effect and the second effect may be different. It may be one that is conceptually related.

  The outline of the present invention is listed below based on the above embodiments.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a technology of a gaming machine that performs a special effect different from a normal big hit effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a big hit game (see JP-A-2017-213104).

  The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that executes a special effect different from a normal big hit effect when a game ball enters a general winning opening during a big hit game.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the dedicated effect is displayed only in one shot in one big hit game, and lacks interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the gaming board 17 having the game area 20 in which the game balls can roll, the first position where the game balls are easy to win, and the second position where the game balls are hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) having a shutter 610 (displacement member) capable of being displaced to a position, first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which game balls can pass in the game area 20, The main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) capable of storing start information based on the game balls passing through the first and second start ports (pass areas), and the shutter 610 based on a determination result based on the start information. The main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which the (displacement member) is displaced to the first position, and the liquid crystal display device 16 (which can display identification information determined based on the start information) Image display means); A main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stopping and displaying after another information is variably displayed, and a sub-control circuit 200 (production effect) capable of executing effect control of an effect device including the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). Control means), wherein the hit game is a first hit game capable of starting a specific game after the hit game has ended, and a new hit game after the hit game has ended. The sub control circuit 200 (production control means) includes a small hit game (second hit game) in which the specific game is not started, and the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) When the specific start information at which the hit game (8R big hit game) occurs is stored, the second specific effect (the second specific effect (different from the first specific effect executed when the specific start information is not stored) Second look ahead production In particular, it is possible to execute a series of continuous production effects), but the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) stores the start information before the specific start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means). In the case where start information for generating a small hitting game (second hitting game) is stored, the second specific effect (second look-ahead effect, especially a series of consecutive effects) is not executed.

  According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Specifically, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the jackpot of the first set of 8Rs (probable change) and the jackpot of the second set of 8Rs (probable change) are continuous (series) (ie, 16R (probability of a big hit) can be given to the player. On the other hand, if the small hit game is performed between the big hit of the first set of 8R (probable change) and the big hit of the second set of 8R (probable change), the second set from the end of the big hit of 8R (probable change) of the first set It is not possible to perform an effect as if the 8R (probable change) of the set continued until the start of the big hit. Therefore, even in the state where the second look-ahead effect can be performed, if the small hit ball is displayed between the two 8R (probable change) reserve balls, the second look-ahead effect is performed. Has been discontinued. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The outline of the present invention is listed below based on the above embodiments.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a technology of a gaming machine that performs a continuous holding suggestion effect that suggests that a jackpot is included in a hold during a performance of a jackpot game (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-15093).

  The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that performs a holding consecutive suggestion effect that indicates that a jackpot is included in a hold as a jackpot effect during a jackpot round game.

  However, the conventional gaming machines described above have a problem that they lack the interest of the game because the timings of indicating the pending reams are the same.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the gaming board 17 having the game area 20 in which the game balls can roll, the first position where the game balls are easy to win, and the second position where the game balls are hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) having a shutter 610 (displacement member) capable of being displaced to a position, first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which game balls can pass in the game area 20, The main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) capable of storing start information based on the game balls passing through the first and second start ports (pass areas), and the shutter 610 based on a determination result based on the start information. The main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which the (displacement member) is displaced to the first position, and the liquid crystal display device 16 (which can display identification information determined based on the start information) Display means) and the identification A game machine including a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stopping and displaying after changing the information, and a sub-control circuit 200 (production control means) for controlling the production, wherein the hit game is A jackpot game (special jackpot game), which is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game (specific game) starts after the jackpot game ends, and a jackpot game in which the jackpot game (specific game) does not start after the jackpot game ends. A non-special jackpot game, and a small hit game that does not newly start the probability change game (specific game) after the hit game has ended, wherein the big hit game occurs and satisfies a predetermined condition, A main control circuit 100 (counting means) capable of accumulating and counting the number of occurrences, and a main control circuit 100 (counting means) for resetting the count value of the counting means when the non-specific jackpot game has occurred. If the count value exceeds a predetermined value, the sub control circuit 200 (effect control) does not perform the shift control to the certainty-change game (specific game) after the big hit game ends. Means), the special electric accessory 600 (winning device) when the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) stores specific start information for generating the big hit game during the small hit game. Can be executed on the basis of the winning of the game ball in the (continuous suggestion effect) (specific effect), but when the count value exceeds a predetermined value due to the occurrence of a big hit game based on the specific start information , Characterized in that the pending consecutive suggestion effect (specific effect) is not executed.

  According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  More specifically, the holding rendezvous can be performed in a case where even if the holding rendezvous suggestion effect is performed, the interest of the player is not reduced. Thus, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The outline of the present invention is listed below based on the above embodiments.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technology of a gaming machine capable of displaying an evaluation result of a game performed by a player has been known (see JP-A-2015-8978).

  The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine capable of ranking and displaying the number of extended games and the number of acquired balls during a specific period.

  However, the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine has a problem that the displayed contents only display the number of consecutive games and the acquired payouts, and lack interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a winning game control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a winning game advantageous to a player, and a notifying unit (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of notifying predetermined information. Device 16), a plus evaluation result calculating means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for calculating a positive evaluation result for the game result during a predetermined period, and a game result during the predetermined period. A negative evaluation result calculating means (for example, sub CPU 201) for calculating a negative evaluation result, and an overall evaluation result calculation for calculating an overall evaluation during the predetermined period based on the positive evaluation result and the negative evaluation result (For example, the sub CPU 201), and the notifying unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) satisfies a predetermined condition. When the said overall evaluation result calculating unit overall evaluation results calculated by (e.g., overall rank) is characterized in that for informing.

  In addition, the hit game includes a specific hit game (for example, a certain-change game) that starts a specific game (for example, a certain-change game) that is advantageous to the player after the completion of the hit game, and the hit game occurs. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a counting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of counting and accumulating the number of occurrences is provided, and when the value counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined value (for example, limit number), After the end of the hit game, the control for shifting to the specific game (for example, the probable change game) is not performed, and the value counted by the counting means is set to the predetermined value (for example, limit) as the end condition of the predetermined period. Number of times), and the predetermined condition includes a specific hit game in which the value counted by the counting means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, Is characterized in that but includes the condition that ends.

  According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the overall rank is calculated so that the higher the number of acquired balls in the JAC game, the higher the rating, and the higher the game count in the JAC game, the lower the rating. Is done. As described above, by incorporating not only the positive evaluation (the number of winning balls in the JAC game) but also the negative evaluation (the game count in the JAC game) into the ranking, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the JAC game. it can.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a hit game control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a hit game advantageous to the player, and a specific game control means (e.g., For example, a game provided with a main CPU 101), an image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling the image display means. A game number counting means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of accumulating and counting the number of games during the specific game; and accumulating and counting the number of hit games during the specific game. Possible hit game number counting means (for example, sub CPU 201), and assigned value counting means (e.g., a sub-CPU 201) for counting a value given to a player by the hit game during the specific game. For example, a sub CPU 201), a game frequency evaluation calculating means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of calculating a game frequency evaluation based on the counting result by the game frequency counting means, and an award based on the counting result by the added value counting means. Value evaluation calculating means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of calculating value evaluation, and winning game number evaluation calculating means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of calculating hit game number evaluation based on the counting result by the hit game number counting means. ), And an overall evaluation capable of calculating an overall evaluation (for example, an overall rank) of the game performed by the player based on the number-of-games evaluation calculating means, the awarded value evaluation calculating means, and the hit game number evaluation calculating means. Calculating means (for example, a sub CPU 201), wherein the comprehensive evaluation calculating means converts the comprehensive evaluation into a low evaluation level. Can be calculated in a plurality of stages from the highest evaluation to the highest evaluation. The larger the count value (for example, the number of acquired payouts) by the above-mentioned added value counting means, the higher the added value evaluation is calculated. The larger the numerical value (for example, the number of JAC), the higher the hit game frequency evaluation is calculated. The larger the count value (for example, game count) by the game frequency counting means, the lower the game frequency evaluation is calculated, and the effect control means. Is characterized in that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the comprehensive evaluation is displayed on the image display means.

  According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  More specifically, the total rank is calculated such that the higher the count value (number of acquired balls in the JAC game) by the added value counting means and the count value (the number of JAC) by the number of hit games counting means, the higher the evaluation. Is calculated so that the larger the count value (game count in the JAC game) by the game frequency counting means, the lower the evaluation. In this way, by incorporating not only the positive evaluation (the number of obtained balls and the game count during the JAC game) but also the negative evaluation (game count) into the ranking, the interest of the player in the JAC game can be improved. .

Note that the main CPU 101 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of a hit game control unit and a specific game control unit.
The sub CPU 201 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of an effect control unit, a game number counting unit, a value added counting unit, an evaluation result calculating unit, and a hit game number counting unit.
Further, the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of an image display unit.

  As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said structure, Various changes are possible within the range of invention described in a claim.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the sub CPU 201 may display not only the total rank but also the ranks of the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of acquired balls on the game evaluation result display screen. Thereby, the player can know the game evaluation result in more detail.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a winning game control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a winning game advantageous to a player, and a notifying unit (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of notifying predetermined information. Device 16), a plus evaluation result calculating means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for calculating a positive evaluation result for the game result during a predetermined period, and a game result during the predetermined period. And a negative evaluation result calculating means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for calculating a negative evaluation result, and an overall evaluation (for example, an overall rank) during the predetermined period based on the positive evaluation result and the negative evaluation result. And a total evaluation result calculating means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for calculating. Value calculation means (e.g., sub CPU 201) capable of calculating a value evaluation based on the value provided to the player by the player, wherein the negative evaluation result calculation means is based on the number of games during the predetermined period. (For example, the sub CPU 201) that can calculate the number of game evaluations, and the notifying unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) calculates the total evaluation result when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that a comprehensive evaluation result (for example, a total rank) calculated by the means is reported.

  In addition, the hit game includes a specific hit game (for example, a certain-change game) that starts a specific game (for example, a certain-change game) that is advantageous to the player after the completion of the hit game, and the hit game occurs. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a counting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of counting and accumulating the number of occurrences is provided, and when the value counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined value (for example, limit number), After the end of the hit game, the control for shifting to the specific game (for example, the probable change game) is not performed, and the value counted by the counting means is set to the predetermined value (for example, limit) as the end condition of the predetermined period. Number of times), and the predetermined condition includes a specific hit game in which the value counted by the counting means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, Is characterized in that but includes the condition that ends.

  According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the overall rank is calculated so that the higher the number of acquired balls in the JAC game, the higher the rating, and the higher the game count in the JAC game, the lower the rating. Is done. As described above, by incorporating not only the positive evaluation (the number of winning balls in the JAC game) but also the negative evaluation (the game count in the JAC game) into the ranking, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the JAC game. it can.

  The outline of the present invention is listed below based on the above embodiments.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine having an error determination unit capable of determining whether an error has occurred has been known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-282505).

  In the above publication, a game board is provided with fraud detecting means for detecting fraudulent magnetism and the like, and when the fraud detecting means detects fraudulent magnetism, it is determined that an error has occurred, and the operation of the movable wing piece is interrupted. Machine is disclosed.

  However, since the magnetism and the like occur even in the normal operation of the gaming machine, the criteria for determining that an error has occurred (determining that the magnet is unauthorized, etc.) fluctuate depending on the surrounding environment, the state of the gaming machine, and the like. There is a problem that detection cannot be performed.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform an appropriate error determination.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing game control in accordance with a game operation performed by a player, and a detection means ( For example, a magnetic sensor), error determination means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not an error has occurred based on a detection signal from the detection means, and an electric drive source for moving the movable body. Effect devices (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 460, the special electric accessory 600, the first movable accessory unit (the effect device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83) An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling the effect device; and a transmission means (for example, a main CPU) capable of transmitting a command from the game control means to the effect control means. PU101), wherein the game control means can execute a reference value setting process of setting a reference value serving as a reference for error determination by the error determination means after power is supplied, The transmission means can transmit a command to the effect control means after the reference value setting processing is executed in the initial setting processing at the time of starting the game control means, and the effect control means, after supplying power, When a command transmitted from the game control means is received, an initialization process including movement of the movable body can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making an appropriate error determination.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is executed after a first period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after a predetermined condition has been satisfied, and the first period and the magnetic sensor After a lapse of a second period (for example, 12 seconds) longer than the total period required for the initialization process (for example, 1 second), the initialization process of the effect device is executed. As described above, the initialization processing of the effect device and the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor are executed at timings that do not overlap each other. Since the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initialization process of the sub CPU 201, the magnetic sensor includes the ordinary electric accessory 460 (start opening solenoid 462) and the special electric accessory 600 (large winning opening solenoid 620). ), In a state in which the drive systems of the first movable auditors unit (producing device 2400), the second movable auditors unit 82, the third movable auditors unit 83, etc. are stopped, the peripheral magnetic field at that time is initialized. The state is stored, and the detected value of the initial state is set as an initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving these driving members. For this reason, it is prevented that the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value are set to be unduly high. Therefore, appropriate fraud detection can be performed.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a game control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a game control in accordance with a game operation performed by a player, and a detection unit (for example, An effect having a magnetic sensor), an error determination unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether an error has occurred based on a detection signal from the detection unit, and an electric drive source for moving the movable body. Devices (e.g., the normal electric accessory 460, the special electric accessory 600, the first movable accessory unit (the rendering device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83); And an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling the effect device, wherein the game control means, after power is supplied, an error judgment by the error judgment means. It is possible to execute a reference value setting process of setting a reference value serving as a reference, the effect control unit can execute an initialization process including movement of the movable body after power is supplied, and the game control unit The reference value setting process is performed after a first period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the power was supplied, and the effect control unit performs the first period and the reference value setting after the power is supplied. An initialization process including the movement of the movable body is performed after a second period (for example, 12 seconds) that is longer than a total period including a period required for the process (for example, one second) has elapsed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making an appropriate error determination.

  Specifically, since the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initialization process of the sub CPU 201, the magnetic sensor includes the ordinary electric accessory 460 (starting port solenoid 462) and the special electric accessory 600 (large prize). In the state where the drive systems of the mouth solenoid 620), the first movable auditors unit (the effect device 2400), the second movable auditors unit 82, the third movable auditors unit 83, etc. are stopped, the surroundings at that time The magnetic field is stored as an initial state, and the detected value of the initial state is set as an initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving these driving members. For this reason, it is prevented that the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value are set to be unduly high. Therefore, appropriate fraud detection can be performed.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a game control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a game control in accordance with a game operation performed by a player, and a detection unit (for example, An effect having a magnetic sensor), an error determination unit (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether an error has occurred based on a detection signal from the detection unit, and an electric drive source for moving the movable body. Devices (e.g., the normal electric accessory 460, the special electric accessory 600, the first movable accessory unit (the rendering device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83); And an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling the effect device, wherein the game control means, after power is supplied, an error judgment by the error judgment means. It is possible to execute a reference value setting process of setting a reference value serving as a reference, the effect control unit can execute an initialization process including movement of the movable body after power is supplied, and the game control unit The reference value setting process is performed after a first period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the power was supplied, and the effect control unit performs the first period and the reference value setting after the power is supplied. After a lapse of a second period (for example, 12 seconds) longer than a total period of time required for the process (for example, 1 second), an initialization process including movement of the movable body is executed, and the game control means includes: The game can be played after the initialization process of the reference value setting process is executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making an appropriate error determination.

  Specifically, the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor is performed before the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 shift to the playable state. Therefore, the magnetic sensor stores the peripheral magnetic field at that time as an initial state in a state where the driving system driven during a game is stopped, and sets the detected value of the initial state as an initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving the driving member. For this reason, it is prevented that the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value are set to be unduly high. Therefore, appropriate fraud detection can be performed.

The main CPU 101 according to the present embodiment is one embodiment of a game control unit and an error determination unit.
The sub CPU 201 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect control unit.

  As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said structure, Various changes are possible within the range of invention described in a claim.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the payout / firing control circuit 300 and the sub CPU 201 perform initial setting at the time of startup and shift to a game-enabled state after a startup wait (12 seconds) based on respective weight timers. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the above-described second embodiment, the initialization at the time of startup and the transition to the playable state may be performed based on a startup command from the main CPU 101. .

16 Liquid crystal display device 100 Main control circuit 101 Main CPU
200 Sub-control circuit 201 Sub-CPU

Claims (1)

A hit game control means capable of executing a hit game advantageous to the player, a specific game control means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player, an image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image, and the image display means Effect control means that can control the game machine,
Game frequency counting means capable of accumulating and counting the number of games during the period of the specific game,
A number of hitting games counting means capable of accumulating and counting the number of hitting games during the period of the specific game,
Value-added counting means for counting the value given to the player by the hit game during the specific game,
A game frequency evaluation calculating means capable of calculating a game frequency evaluation based on the counting result by the game frequency counting means,
Value-added evaluation calculation means capable of calculating a value-added evaluation based on the counting result by the value-added counting means,
A hit game frequency evaluation calculating means capable of calculating a hit game frequency evaluation based on the counting result by the hit game frequency counting means,
Based on the number-of-games evaluation calculation means, the awarded value evaluation calculation means, and the number-of-hits-games evaluation calculation means, an overall evaluation calculation means capable of calculating an overall evaluation of a game performed by a player,
The comprehensive evaluation calculating means, the comprehensive evaluation, it is possible to calculate over a plurality of stages from a low evaluation to a high evaluation stage,
The larger the count value by the value added counting means, the higher the value added evaluation is calculated,
The larger the count value by the hit game number counting means, the higher the hit game number evaluation is calculated,
The larger the count value by the game number counting means, the lower the game number evaluation is calculated,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect control means displays the comprehensive evaluation on the image display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Images